JP2020110639A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving fun of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: shooting means which shoots a game ball toward a game area; a ball entry part into which a game ball circulating through the game area can enter; information acquisition means which acquires special information, based on entry of a game ball into the ball entry part; acquisition information storage means which stores the acquired special information with a predetermined prescribed number as an upper limit; determination means that determines whether special information stored in the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition; hold display means which displays pieces of hold display corresponding to the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquisition information storage means in a predetermined display mode, and changes the display mode of hold display under display; and performance execution means which executes a performance. The performance execution means executes a suggestive performance for suggesting a change in the display mode of hold display before the hold display means changes the display mode of hold display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure, control, and production in order to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-172988, A

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes.

[form]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Hold display means for displaying the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored by the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode, and changing the display mode of the displayed hold display,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed, before the display mode of the hold display is changed by the hold display means.

According to the gaming machine of the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a win/loss table stored in a win/loss table storage area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a suggestive production, a specific end production, and a specific start production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which a pachinko machine performs in a standby state. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of processing in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the volume of background music has become zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started. 7 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while the volume of background music is being reduced. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting opening. 7 is a flowchart showing a destination determination process. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for a through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is a flow chart which shows game state shift processing. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a condition determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for standby. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a flow chart which shows a starting command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning. It is the flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flowchart showing an opening effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows waiting state shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of a display of a symbol display device at the time of performing suggestive production in a preceding game time. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment performs. It is the explanation drawing which shows the outline of setting processing of production type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object A which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object B which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object C which is an object image. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for object A. It is an explanatory view showing an arrangement/timing setting table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice effect in which a plurality of objects are combined. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing of production type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the setting process of the effect type in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a display object table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AB. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display pattern table for BC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (B2-B3/C1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for ABC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set. It is a flowchart showing a setting process of the effect type in the sixth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the sequel production performed as reach production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when RTC production start conditions are satisfied while the pattern display device is displaying a background moving image. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when RTC production start conditions are satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying a demo video. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when a transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying the RTC effect moving image. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when a return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying an RTC effect moving image. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for RTC production performed in a sound-light side MPU of a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state transfer process performed in the sound-light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding process performed in the display side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline|summary of the process which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows the update processing at the time of winning in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for holding production in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the parameter setting processing for holding production in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows display level upper limit value setting processing in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the upper limit table in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production setting processing in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production setting processing in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production contents decision processing in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the holding production determination table in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for holding effects in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the parameter setting processing for holding production in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production setting processing in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production contents determination processing in a 9th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (other example 1) performs. It is a storage area for holding effect in the tenth embodiment (variant example 1). It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (other example 2) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (other example 3) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 4) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object D which can be used for notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image (object D+image E) which combined the image E with the object D.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Overview of processing by the gaming machine:
A4. Overview of processing in the standby state:
A5. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
A6. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment (an example of effect type setting processing):
F. Sixth embodiment (another example of effect type setting processing):
G. Seventh embodiment (configuration including RTC):
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth Embodiment:
K. Modification:
L. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments and the like:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported on the outer frame 11 by a metal hinge 15. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time played by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two sheet glasses is arranged, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine (not shown) and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and a player operates the lever 23 to switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball drops from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

In front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20, a production operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor for detecting a dynamic operation amount by a change in electric resistance is provided. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the turning operation amount, A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for effects.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. The tank rail 55 having the, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, the supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and the payout of a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down in the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

Both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are opened upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so that the first starting port 33 is above the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won any of the various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the prize. As a result of the internal lottery, when the power combination opening is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the power combination opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning and the second position. It is possible to win a prize in the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if a game ball wins the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big hit is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the open/close door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game balls can win. The opening/closing execution mode shifts to the case where the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, and the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning in the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible is performed. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning a prize opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be won is performed. In the present embodiment, when the game balls are won in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning in the first starting opening 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the first result display section 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

When the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the prize in the second starting opening 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display unit displays the lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the second result display section 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The tokusatsu unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory release lottery triggered by the winning of the winning through the through gate 35 is performed, the universal figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is completed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the general drawing unit 38 are not limited to be configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. For example, the display device may be configured by various display devices capable of displaying the lottery result and the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode or a display corresponding thereto. A round game is an open/close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured by a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the first result display unit 37a based on the winning in the first starting opening 33. In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the second result display section 37b based on the winning in the second starting opening 34. .. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as a variable display pattern, a pattern in which a pattern such as a character is added to each pattern showing the numbers 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed on the activated line L in a stopped state. Specifically, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol sequence Z1, the symbol sequence Z3, and the symbol sequence Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as the number can be adopted as the mode of variable display of symbols.

Here, the game number is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment obtains the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first result display section 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. In either one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, a predetermined value is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time, which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4B, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using block diagrams.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to multiple detection sensors. The main MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA during a game has won each winning opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes an electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the open/close door 36b is opened/closed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory release lottery, when the electric role is opened, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. Display control is executed.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In the case of doing, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case where the winning of the second starting opening 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls. A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production reflecting the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the notice effect executed at each game time. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in the jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1 is used for the big hit lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery of whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the fluctuation type counter CS is used when determining the fluctuation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

A holding information storage area 64b is provided in the RAM 64. The reservation information storage area 64b is composed of a first reservation area Ra, a second reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reservation number storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning are chronologically arranged in the reserved information storage area 64b. Memorized in.

The jackpot random number counter C1 will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and the game ball in the second starting opening 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a win/loss table in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as lottery modes for the jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a win/loss table for the high probability. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, there are two random number values for the jackpot win. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the big hit lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit is 20. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 33, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM64), and when the game ball is winning in the second starting opening 34, the holding information is stored. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of jackpot lottery after completion of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric power accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number of individual items is reached. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings to the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball may be set.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high frequency winning mode has a higher occurrence frequency than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may not be substantially won.

In the pachinko machine 10, the probability variation lottery mode in which the jackpot lottery is performed using the win/loss table for high probability as the win/loss table and the win/loss table It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a win/loss table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for high probability, the jackpot lottery is won compared to the case where the jackpot drawing is performed using the winning/discarding table for low probability. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4, but in the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released and the electric accessory 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set to be shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set to be shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second start opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start opening 33 is higher than in the second start opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start opening 34 is more likely to be won than the first start opening 33. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is paid to the second starting opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. You can

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is more frequently in the electric-role open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are secured to be secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed, a low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set such that a shorter securing time is easier to select or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is concerned. Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode with respect to the low frequency support mode is enhanced by applying one or any combination of conditions of shortening the average time of securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots on the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of types of jackpots. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot, 16R normal Big hit, 8R Normal big hit is set.

In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the win/loss lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of becomes the high frequency support mode.

In the 16R regular jackpot and the 8R regular jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning/discarding lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of becomes the high frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 13” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “14 to 27” are the 8R regular jackpots. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the modes of jackpots are diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is the next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to suppress monotonization of the game and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port of FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34, the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot. Is set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “28 to 39” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all of the jackpots based on the winning of the second start opening 34 are probability variation jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is the jackpot winning based on the winning of the first start opening 33 This is different from when the jackpot is won based on the winning in the starting opening 34.

As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that a winning will be generated in the second starting opening 34 of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It should be noted that, if the result of the win/win lottery is out, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the win/win lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display on the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. The display mode is determined. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting opening 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is used for the reach determination. It is checked against the table to determine whether or not to reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot will be established. It is displayed, and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), first the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z2.

Also, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, In addition to reducing or displaying the combination of the symbols in which the reach line is formed, the reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. Further, when the reach effect is being performed or before the reach display, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not the advance notice display using the predetermined image such as the predetermined character is performed. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation display on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and is stored in the electric duty holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, and the second holding area Rb. The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are stored in, corresponds to the holding information related to the second starting port 34, and these holding information is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to.

A3. Overview of processing by the gaming machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. In the present description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of case a1 and case a2 as an example.

In FIG. 9A, as a case a1, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “big jackpot”), and the jackpot in the second game round executed after the first game round. The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the player is out of the lottery is shown. In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the game time immediately before the first game time is out and there is no other game time between the first game time and the second game time. Explain. It should be noted that another game time may exist between the first game time and the second game time. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. The notice effect is an effect executed immediately before or after the start of the change of the symbols, and is an effect for suggesting to the player the degree of expectation to win the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is an effect that is executed after the reach, and is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The special game state is a state in which a bonus is given to the player. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting the opening/closing execution mode, as an opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b is repeated. During the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, in this description, a period for executing the ending effect is referred to as an ending period.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests reproducing the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game time. Further, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the special game state.

FIG. 10: is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a suggestion production, the specific end production, and the specific start production mentioned later. FIG. 10A shows a suggested effect, FIG. 10B shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10C shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10A is an effect that suggests that the female character reproduces the effect executed in the first game time, that is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, after the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect in the ending period, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are performed. Reproduce and execute. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect executed in the first game time are reproduced, but the notice effect, the reach effect, or the result executed in the first game time is reproduced. You may reproduce only a part of announcement production. For example, when executing a notice effect, a reach effect, and a result notification effect as a special game state reproduction effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect are preferentially reproduced, and the notice effect is partially or entirely omitted. Good. By omitting a part or all of the notice effect that is executed at high frequency during normal times, by preferentially reproducing the reach effect and the result notification effect (big hit notification) that are executed only during the reach or jackpot, the player can The special game state reproduction effect can be executed by focusing on the effect that strongly desires the reproduction, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game time. Some of the contents are different from the design.

After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the specific end effect. FIG.10(b) has shown an example of the specific termination effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that the female character has completed the special game state reproduction effect.

Description will be returned to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state with the end of the specific end effect. After that, the second game time is executed. The jackpot lottery for the second game is out. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect (also referred to as a normal notice effect) for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notice effect (disappearance notice). The case a1 has been described above.

Next, the case a2 will be described. FIG. 9B shows, as a case a2, a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game time. ..

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting the opening/closing execution mode, as an opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening/closing execution mode in which opening/closing of the opening/closing door 36b is repeated. After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect in the ending period.

In case a2, unlike case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggested effect in the ending period. The content of the suggestive effect is the same as the content of the suggestive effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestive effect. That is, the ending period in case a2 is shorter than the ending period in case a1.

The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestive effect. After that, the second game time is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is won also in the second game time. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game time reproduction effect as an effect in the second game time. The game time reproduction effect is an effect for reproducing at least a part of the effect already executed in the game time. In the present embodiment, as the game time reproduction effect, the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. That is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (big hit notification) executed in the first game time are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (big hit notification) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect, and also has a function as a result notification about the big hit lottery of the second game time. Then, with the end of the game time reproduction effect, the second game time is ended.

In addition, as will be described later with reference to a flowchart, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. That is, in case a2, since the first game time and the second game time are both game times that are won in the jackpot lottery, the variation time of the first game time and the variation of the second game time The time is the same. Therefore, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time can be executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is controlled to be constant, but the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is set by using a random number. , The variation time of the game times at the time of a big hit may be different every time. In this case, if the second game time is longer than the first game time, at the start of the second game time, the time difference between the fluctuation times of the second game time and the first game time (Surplus time) may be used to perform the suggestive effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestive effects for each length of extra time, even if the extra time is different each time, the suggestive effect can be executed at the start of the second game time. The suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is executed after the suggestive effect executed in the special game state after the first game time. Therefore, the content of the suggestive effect to be executed using the surplus time is set so that the suggestive effect to be executed in the special game state and the suggestive effect to be executed using the surplus time have continuity. Good. By doing so, even when the second game time is longer than the first game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed in the second game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

If the second game time is shorter than the first game time, only part of the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are executed as the game time reproduction effect. May be For example, when executing a notice production, a reach production, and a result announcement production as a game time reproduction production, the reach production and the result announcement production are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the notice production is omitted to reproduce the game time. May be executed. By omitting a part or all of the notice effect that is executed at high frequency during normal times, by preferentially reproducing the reach effect and the result notification effect (big hit notification) that are executed only during the reach or jackpot, the player can It is possible to preferentially reproduce the production that strongly desires reproduction.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state after the end of the second gaming time. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect in a subsequent special game state when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is a win and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

FIG. 10C shows an example of the specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is an effect that suggests that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game time, and the special game state (opening and closing due to the jackpot in the second game time). This is an effect that suggests that the execution mode) is started. The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect after executing the specific start effect. In this case, the effect executed in the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect (normal ending effect) are effects executed in the normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is over.

Heretofore, the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described using the two cases of case a1 and case a2. As described in case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is missed, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are executed in the first game time. It is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect, and the player recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are already executed in terms of effect. Although it is executed as an effect to reproduce the effect, it is actually a game time reproduction effect that is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. When the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 is being watched first, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to anticipate winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game time, while recognizing that it is merely reproduction of the effect. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game time, the result notification effect notifies that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game time are not reproductions of the effects executed in the first game time, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery for the times. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in case a2 in this way, the game is given a surprising effect and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the effect. In addition, by making the second game times in case a2 unpredictable by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested that the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to expect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won. Therefore, it is possible to further give the game unexpectedness.

Further, as in case a2, when the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game time, the result notification effect in the second game time is executed. Even if it is done, the player may not be aware that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game time, but since the specific start effect is executed in the special game state after the end of the second game time. At the time when the specific start effect is executed, the player can be made aware that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game time.

A4. Overview of processing in the standby state:
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the standby state will be described. The standby state is a state after the game time has ended, and neither the special game state nor the next game time is started.

FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in the standby state. In FIG. 11, a state diagram showing whether or not the symbol displayed on the main display unit 45 is changing, the display mode of the symbol display device 41, and the output of the voice output from the voice emission control device 90. The content and the audio output level (volume) are shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the standby state flag in the main control device 60 is turned on and off, the transition condition satisfaction flag in the main control device 60 is turned on and off, and the cue determination flag in the voice emission control device 90 is shown. ON and OFF states are shown. These flags will be described later.

The numbers such as “01” described in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 indicate the temporal position of the moving image data, and “01” indicates the head position of the moving image data. The temporal position of the video data is the position of the video data corresponding to each time of the video displayed with the temporal length, and is the temporal position of the video when the video data is captured with the temporal length. This is the position of the corresponding moving image data. As the temporal position of the moving image data, for example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed up to the temporal position of “30”, the moving image data returns to the temporal position of “01” and is displayed from the beginning.

A number such as "01" described in the output content of the voice indicates the temporal position of the music data, and "01" indicates the head position of the music data. The temporal position of the music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music output with a temporal length, and is the temporal position of the music when the music data is captured with a temporal length. This is the position of the corresponding music data. As the time position of the music data, for example, a time code recorded in the music data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output up to the temporal position of “30”, it returns to the temporal position of “01” and is output from the beginning.

The display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display a background moving image during the game time when a display corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is performed, and even in the standby state after the game time is over, the background animation is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Is continuously displayed. The background moving image is a moving image displayed on the background side of the symbol on the symbol display device 41, and when an image or moving image such as the above-mentioned notice effect or reach effect is displayed, it is displayed on the background side of these images or moving images. Is displayed. The background moving image of the present embodiment is a moving image in which a character is dancing to the rhythm of background music described later.

The sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output the background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the background moving image described above in the game round, and also from the speaker 46 in the standby state after the game round ends. Is output continuously. In the present embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output corresponding to the background video, and has the same temporal length as the background video. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, by outputting the background music at the temporal position “10” at the timing at which the background video at the temporal position “10” is displayed, the background video is displayed and the rhythm of the background music is displayed. A production in which one and one correspond to each other is realized.

As shown in FIG. 11, main controller 60 turns the standby state flag ON (time t1) when the game time ends, that is, when the variation of the symbol on main display unit 45 stops. Then, the main controller 60, after the fluctuation of the symbols on the main display unit 45 is stopped and becomes the standby state, if 15 seconds have passed without starting either the special game state or the next game time, That is, when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned on, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the transition condition satisfied flag is turned on, and the standby state flag is turned off (time t2).

The transition condition is that the output mode of the voice is switched from the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player to the mode in which the volume of the background music is zero (silent state), and This is a condition for shifting the display mode from the mode in which the background video is displayed to the mode in which the demo video is displayed. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the voice output mode shifts to the mode in which the continuity of the background music is broken, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is broken. .. In addition, the demonstration video (demonstration video) is a video different from the background video and is a video for communicating the attraction of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demo movie, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the playing method of the pachinko machine 10 is explained, and the characters and stories that appear in the pachinko machine 10 are explained. The demo video may be called an attract video.

As shown in FIG. 11, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the sound emission control device 90 outputs the sound in the background music at the volume preset by the player (time t2. From (1) to (3), the volume of the background music is reduced (fade out) over time while continuing the output of the background music (the mode from time t2 to time t3), and the volume of the background music is zero. The mode is changed to a certain mode (mode after time t3). In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 continues to output the background music until the volume of the background music becomes zero until 5 seconds have passed, and after the volume of the background music becomes zero. The output of the background music is stopped at the timing (time t4) when 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the volume preset by the game ball is the maximum volume.

When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 shifts the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode in which a demo video is displayed 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero (time). t4). The sound emission control device 90 turns on the cue determination flag at the timing when the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4). The cue determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to start displaying and outputting the background video and background music from the temporal start position “01” when a return condition described later is satisfied. is there. In the present embodiment, the cue determination flag shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted in the output mode of the sound, and the mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is interrupted in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 It is turned on when shifting to.

The main controller 60, after the transition condition is satisfied, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the game times (variable display of symbols) are started, the return condition is set. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned off. The return condition is that the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and the output mode of the voice is returned to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player. It is a condition.

As shown in FIG. 11, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (time t5), the cue determination flag is set. Is ON, the display control device 100 and the sound emission control device 90 execute the cueing process of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image. The sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, outputs the background music from the temporal start position “01”. To start. Therefore, both the background moving image and the background music are displayed and output from the temporal head position.

The sound emission control device 90 is capable of outputting a plurality of types of background music, and performs a cue process for background music and a background moving image (a process for starting output of music or display of a moving image from a temporal start position “01”). ) Is performed, the type of background music to be subjected to the cueing process is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 displays a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to a plurality of types of background music. A background moving image that can be displayed and corresponds to the selected background music may be selected to execute the cueing process. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of processing in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started. As shown in FIG. 12, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started (time t4), the cue determination flag is set. Is off, the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 returns the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. To execute. In this way, the display mode and the voice output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied.

FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while the volume of background music is being reduced. As shown in FIG. 13, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), since the cue determination flag is OFF, the display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display the background. The mode for displaying the moving image is continued, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. In this way, the display mode and the voice output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11). The display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and at the time of outputting the background music, from the predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes depending on the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position for starting the display of the background video changes depending on the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started, the demo video is displayed. When returning to the mode in which the background video is displayed from the temporal position of the background video displayed immediately before the transition to the mode in which the display mode is displayed or the mode in which the demo video is displayed is changed to the mode in which the background video is displayed , A configuration in which the temporal position of the background video to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the demo video, after the transition from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the demo video Also, the background video is continuously played as an internal process, and the background video that is being continuously played is displayed as an internal process when returning from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Are listed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11 ), the display control device 100. Starts the display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the audio emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started at a position midway in time and the output of the background music is started at a position midway in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a temporally middle position of the background video and the output is started from a temporally middle position of the background music, the player, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background moving image and the background music are to be viewed from a position midway in time, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or feels unsatisfactory because there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that is not being listened to. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position, so that it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the background moving image and the background music can be enjoyed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode in which the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, so that While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, the mode before the transition condition is satisfied can be restored in a natural flow without a feeling of discomfort.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13 ), the display control device 100 continues the mode in which the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music. It is possible to return in a natural flow without feeling uncomfortable with the mode before the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the game time is over, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds elapse without starting any of the special game state and the next game time, so the game is executed. It is possible to reduce the volume of background music with the passage of time in a state in which it is highly possible that a person is not playing a game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game time is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the voice Since the output mode returns to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player, the expectation that the game time has started can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

A5. Various processes executed in the main control unit:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the processing shown in case a1 and case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

In order to advance the game of each game time, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S103.

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum values, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S104.

In step S104, a winning process for the starting openings associated with winning the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the starting opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, a winning process for a through game accompanying the winning of the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for starting mouth>
Next, the winning process for the starting opening will be described. The winning process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14: S104).

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting opening. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting opening 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first starting opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set. Then, it progresses to step S203.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step S204.

In step S204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first startup hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on winning in the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step S209.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first start opening 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start opening 34. 2 The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the starting port 34.

When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set. Then, it progresses to step S207. On the other hand, in step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for the main starting port ends.

In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step S208.

In step S208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on winning in the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step S209.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, if the number N of start-up suspensions is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step S209, when the start pending number N is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, after adding 1 to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, the process proceeds to step S211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step S212.

In step S212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are set to the first storage area of the corresponding free storage areas, that is, the step The number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in S210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14). The value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210. When the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are set to It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (held information), the jackpot lottery result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the occurrence of reach. It is a process of determining whether or not the holding information is present before the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

The hold command indicates that the winning information is generated in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the determination result by the preceding determination process based on the holding information acquired based on the winning is the main control device. This is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm before being targeted for the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process described later.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 increases the number of hold. To the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of the held display of the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. To the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold.

After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the main starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S213) of the winning opening winning process.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the prior determination process is based on the hold information, the jackpot lottery winning determination, determination of the type of jackpot, determination of whether or not the reach occurs, such as the hold information, the jackpot by the main control device 60 This is a process to be executed before the target of the lottery.

In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the winning opening for the starting opening (FIG. 15) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this prize is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed by the prize before this prize is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the jackpot lottery by this prize. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this prize is executed as the game time is determined.

In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning is executed as the game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the win/loss table storage area. The win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this prize is executed as the game time (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304, and the high-probability mode As a result of referring to the hit/no hit table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the high probability mode.

When it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and the value is stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to, If it is acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34, the second start opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. When it determines with it corresponding to a probability variation jackpot in step S308 (S308:YES), it progresses to step S309 and memorize|stores probability variation jackpot information in the prior determination process result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311, and the value is stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening this time. The value of the reached reach random number counter C3 is read. After that, the process advances to step S312 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S313, when it is determined that the reach occurrence is supported (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S313 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (S313: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described. The through winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14: S105).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the winning process for through. In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. When it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has won the through-gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether. The bonus holding number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 which are reserved for performing the electric bonus opening lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the winning process for this through is ended.

When it determines with it being less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN in step S402 (S402:YES), it progresses to step S403 and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step S404.

In step S404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the winning process for through is ended.

On the other hand, in step S402, when it is determined that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (S402: NO), that is, when the value of the accessory holding number SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The winning process for through is ended without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device when the power is turned on, the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are determined. Then, it progresses to step S502.

In step S502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Then, it progresses to step S503.

In step S503, the output data such as the startup command set in step S502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S505.

In step S505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, game time control processing for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a, the second result display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S506, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S508.

In step S508, the electric power support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the process for supporting electric role, it is determined whether or not the electric role object 34a is opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S509.

In step S<b>509, a standby process for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined time is executed. Details of the standby process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S510.

In step S510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S503). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S510: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps S511 and S512. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In addition, in step S512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S510: YES), the process returns to step S503, and each process from step S503 to step S508 is performed. Execute.

In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S503 to step 507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S506).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the game number control process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not it is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, the opening/closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The open/close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition processing, which will be described later, and is turned OFF when the open/close execution mode is also terminated in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period.

When it is determined in step S601 that any of the opening period flag, the opening/closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in effect, and the processing in step S602 and subsequent steps is performed. Without executing any, this game time control processing is ended. That is, in the special game state, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a prize is given to the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S601 that the special game state is not in effect (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether the variable display flag of the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

In step S602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (S602: NO), the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved quantity CRN is “0” means that the reserved quantity to be started is “0” for both the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S603: YES), the present game number control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S605, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S606.

In step S606, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by 1. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, the standby state flag is turned off. The standby state flag is a flag that is turned on at the timing when the standby state is started and turned off at the timing when the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started or when 15 seconds have passed after the standby state was started. is there. After executing step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

In step S608, it is determined whether or not the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON. The transition condition satisfaction flag is a flag that is turned on at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state was started and turned off at the timing when the variable display on the main display unit 45 is started. When it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON (S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S608: NO), the game number control process is ended.

In step S609, a return condition satisfaction command is set. The return condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to recognize that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has been started, that is, the return condition has been satisfied. After executing step S609, the process proceeds to step S610.

In step S610, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned off. Then, the game number control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S602: YES), the game-time progression process of steps S611 to S615 is executed.

In step S611, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 22) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

When it is determined in step S611 that the variation time has not elapsed (S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612 and the variation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode on the result display unit related to the current game time. After executing step S612, the game number control process is ended.

When it is determined in step S611 that the variation time has elapsed (S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S613, and variation end processing is executed. The fluctuation ending process is performed by changing the result display unit so that the mode of the symbol displayed in the result display unit determined in the fluctuation starting process (FIG. 21) described later is displayed in the result display unit related to the current game time. Display control. After executing step S613, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S614, the standby state flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S615 and performs a waiting state time setting process. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the standby state, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step S615, the game number control process is ended.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a game time control process subroutine (FIG. 19: S604).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the holding area that is the processing target for executing the data setting processing is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra) among the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6). The information) is stored in the first reserved area (first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb) stored earliest among the reserved information stored in time series in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 6). (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information). On the other hand, among the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra (FIG. 6) in time series, the holding information stored first in the second holding area Rb (FIG. 6) is stored in time series. If the earliest stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S701, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

When it is determined in step S701 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S701: YES), the data setting process for the first reservation area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S701 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S701: NO). ), and the data setting process for the second holding area in steps S708 to S713 is executed.

In step S702, the first starting hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S703, in which the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S705.

In step S705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S706, if the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variable display this time is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step S707.

In step S707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the data shift this time corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33 The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. To do. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of reserved items.

When it is determined in step S701 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S701: NO), It proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step S709. In step S709, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S711.

In step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S712, if the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step S713.

In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this data setting process is completed.

The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S605) of the game time control processing.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the win/win lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and in the present embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variation jackpot. After that, it is normally turned off when the jackpot is won. When it is determined in step S801 that the high probability mode is set (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802.

In step S802, a win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. Determine whether. Then, it progresses to step S804. On the other hand, when it is determined that the high probability mode is not set in step S801 (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

In step S803, the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A. Determine whether. Then, it progresses to step S804.

In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (big win lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In step S804, if the result of the winning/non-winning determination is a big hit (S804: YES), in steps S805 to S812, in order to set a process for setting a game result in the case of a big hit and a stop result. The process of is executed.

In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S806, and the first start port distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 8B). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certainty jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in. After executing the processing of step S806 or step S807. It proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step S808 that the game result is a probability variation big hit (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S809, a stop result setting process for the probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game time to be won for the probability variation jackpot, fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the probability variation big hit stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

In step S810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R certainty variation jackpot is turned on when the 16R certainty variation jackpot is turned on, and the 8R certainty variation flag is turned on when the 8R certainty variation jackpot is given. Then, it progresses to step S814.

In step S808, when it is determined that the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not the probability variation jackpot (S808: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S811. move on.

In step S811, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for normal jackpot changes in the state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game time when the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 can be obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

In step S812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned on. Specifically, when the 16R normal jackpot is hit, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and when the 8R normal jackpot is hit, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step S814.

In step S804, when the result of the big hit lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not the big hit (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and the stop result setting process for out-of-range is executed. With the stop result setting process for the time of disengagement, the variable display is terminated in the state where any of the stop results is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game time that is the disengagement result. This is a process for setting Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-range in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

In step S814, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the occurrence of a reach. Processing. The details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S814, the process proceeds to step S815.

In step S815, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and whether or not the reach has occurred. Information and the variable time information set in step S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S815: YES), the flow advances to step S817 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34, and whether or not the reach has occurred. Information and the variable time information set in step S814. After executing step S816 or step S817, the process proceeds to step S818.

In step S818, the type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S816 to S818 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

In step S819, the variable display of the symbols is started on the result display section corresponding to the current game time among the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified to be the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second result display unit flag is ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, the fluctuation start process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 21: S814).

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step S901, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, the variation time table corresponding to the current variation type counter CS value is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step S902 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game time is not a win (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the current game time. Since the present process (S905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game number is not won in step S902, the reach occurs among the game numbers not won in the jackpot lottery in step S905. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. When the presence/absence of the reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S906, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

When it is determined in step S905 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the total pending numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN may be used, and the smaller the number of total reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending quantity RaN increases, and when the second start pending quantity RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start pending numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first starting pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second starting pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence is generated so that a shorter variable time is selected as compared with the case where the number of hold information is the same as that in the low frequency support mode. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is out. Good. Further, the variation time table for the probability variation big hit, the variation time table for the normal big hit, the variation time table for the out-reach, and the variation time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 18: S507).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S1001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state, as described with reference to FIG.

When it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when ending the opening/closing execution mode.

When it is determined in step S1002 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

When it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the timing at which the variable display of symbols on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b ends. Or not. In step S1004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is ended (S1004: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step S1004 that it is the timing when the variable display ends (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result of this game time (the result of the jackpot lottery) is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step S1005 that the game result of this game time (the result of the big hit lottery) corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006, and the standby state flag Is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1007, and the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S1008.

In step S1008, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in each timer counter area 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S1008, the process proceeds to step S1009.

In step S1009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). This opening command includes information about the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1009, the process advances to step S1010 to turn on the opening period flag. Then, this game state transition processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1011 it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1011 that the opening period has ended (S1011: YES), the flow advances to step S1012 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step S1013.

In step S1013, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. Then, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S1013, the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation flag, 8R certainty variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R certainty variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. When it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R certainty variation flag or the 16R normal flag (S1014: YES), the process proceeds to step S1015, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty change flag or the 8R normal flag (S1014: NO), the process proceeds to step S1016, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “8” is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. After executing step S1015 or step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017.

In step S1017, the open/close execution mode flag is turned on. Then, this game state transition processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S1002 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1018, and the special winning opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving section 36c is driven on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, and the big winning is achieved. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit is provided on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S1018, the process proceeds to step S1019.

In step S1019, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1019: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1019: YES), the process proceeds to step S1020, and the open/close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1021.

In step S1021, round display end processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S1021, the process proceeds to step S1022.

In step S1022, condition determination processing is executed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery at the next game time, the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, and the effect (notice effect, reach effect It is determined whether or not to execute the process of reproducing the result notification effect (big hit notification). The condition determination process will be described later. After executing step S1022, the process proceeds to step S1023.

In step S1023, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the ending period in the special gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024.

In step S1024, an ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S1024, the process proceeds to step S1025.

In step S1025, the ending period flag is turned on. Then, this game state transition processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

In step S1026, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1023), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in the ending time setting process (FIG. 25) described later. When it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S1026: YES), the process proceeds to step S1027.

In step S1027, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S1028, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1028, the process proceeds to step S1029.

In step S1029, the standby state flag is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S1030, and the standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. After executing step S1030, the present game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, in step S1026, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S1026: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: 1017) of the game state transition processing.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing processing. In step S1101, it is determined whether the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. When it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1102: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1103: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable winning drive unit is opened to open the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Then, it progresses to step S1105.

In step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all the winning modes that have been set are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency winning mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. May be set. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

In step S1106, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening/closing processing is ended. The open command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the special winning opening 36a has started, and is a command for normal processing. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. The contents are updated to correspond to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the special winning opening 36a is opened. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

When it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When it is determined in step S1108 that no winning has occurred (S1108: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1108 that a winning has occurred (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, and the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step S1110.

In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1110: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1107: YES), or when it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111, and the special winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step S1112.

In step S1112, 1 is subtracted from the value in the first round counter area RC1. Then, it progresses to step S1113 and it is determined whether the value of the 1st round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1113: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process advances to step S1115 to set a close command. After that, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is completed, and is a normal process. In the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of FIG. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has ended. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did.

<Condition determination processing>
Next, the condition determination process will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1022) of the game state transition process.

As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. The condition to be able to execute the processing of case a2 is to win the big hit lottery in the first game time and also win the big hit lottery in the second game time. This condition determination processing is executed immediately before the end of the opening/closing execution mode after winning the big hit lottery in the game time, and is a process of determining whether or not to win the big hit lottery in the next game time.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the condition determination process. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the reserved number CRN>0. By executing this processing, when executing the special game state after the first game time, it is confirmed whether or not there is a game time immediately after the special game state. When there is no game time, immediately after the suggestion effect, there is no game time corresponding to the second game time capable of executing the game time reproduction effect, and the process of case a2 cannot be executed. ..

When it is determined in step S1201 that the number of reserved CRN>0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1201 that the number CRN of reservations is not greater than 0 (S1201: NO), the present condition determination processing is directly terminated.

In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the next game time is read. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the winning opening for the starting opening (FIG. 15) is read. Then, it progresses to step S1203.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the processing, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery related to the next game time is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

When it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204, and the low probability mode win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referred to. Then, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205, and the high probability mode win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a is referred to. .. After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

When it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In the case a2 (FIG. 9), the effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces the game time reproduction effect executed in the second game time in the ending period of the special game state after the second game time. This flag is used to prevent execution. When it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208, and the condition satisfaction flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step S1209.

In step S1209, a condition satisfaction command is set. The condition satisfaction command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the condition satisfaction flag is ON. The condition fulfillment command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 18: step S503). After that, the condition determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or when it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. (S1207: YES), the present condition determination processing is ended as it is.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1023) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

When it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 which is the ending time timer. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game in the case of case a2 of FIG. In case a2, only the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, and the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game time is not executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, 6 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the suggestive effect. After executing step S1303, the process advances to step S1304 to turn off the condition satisfaction flag. Then, it progresses to step S1305.

In step S1305, the effect duplication avoidance flag is turned on. Then, the ending time setting process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game in the case of case a1 in FIG. In the case of case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed in the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 30 seconds are secured as the ending time required for executing the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In the present embodiment, the time required for the suggestive effect is constant at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is constant at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the flow advances to step S1307 to set an effect duplication avoidance command. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for causing the sub light emitting control device 90 to recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process. After executing step S1307, the process advances to step S1308.

In step S1308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game in the case a2 of FIG. In case a2, a normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 8 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the normal ending effect.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1028) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit is turned on in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

When it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R certainty variation flag or the 8R certainty variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402, and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, their states are maintained. .. After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S1404 to turn on the high-frequency support mode flag. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and the support mode is shifted to the gaming state which is the high-frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. Then, it progresses to step S1405.

In step S1405, the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. Then, it progresses to step S1406.

In step S1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Then, it progresses to step S1410.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1407 and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, their states are maintained. .. Then, it progresses to step S1408.

In step S1408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S1409, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S1410.

In step S1410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, the process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 18: S508).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support process. In step S1501, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the open state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric role 34a is to be opened, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1503: NO), the main electric power support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

In step S1504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1504: YES), the flow advances to step S1505 to set the off display, and then the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38 is terminated in a state where the deviation display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0”. When it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is “0” (S1506: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S1508 and it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step S1507 (S1507: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step S1508 (S1508: YES), the flow advances to step S1509 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step S1510.

In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1509 is support win. When it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned on, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. "3" is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, it progresses to step S1512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

In step S1512, it is determined whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode. When it is determined in step S1512 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1512 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1512: NO), the main electric power support support process is ended.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. When it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1513: NO), the main electric power combination support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1513 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1514, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S1515.

In step S1515, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process for supporting the electric power combination ends.

The low-frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the normal external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the processing corresponding thereto.

If it is determined in step S1507 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516 to open the electric auditors item open lottery. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory release lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step S1517.

In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1516 is support win. When it is determined in step S1517 that the support is not won (S1517: NO), the main electric power support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1517 that the support is won (S1517: YES), the process proceeds to step S1518, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1519, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1519: NO), the pattern change display in the universal figure unit 38 is being performed, so the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

In step S1520, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step S1521, and the in-support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. After that, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is ON (S1501: YES), the flow advances to step S1522 to execute electric role opening/closing control processing for opening/closing controlling the electric accessory 34a. After that, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Electrical part opening/closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening/closing control process will be described. The electric-role combination opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: S1522) of the electric-role combination support process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1602: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

When it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1605, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1605: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606 to turn off the in-support flag. After that, the electric power combination opening/closing control process is ended.

When it is determined in step S1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1607: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1607: YES), the process proceeds to step S1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric auditors' product 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step S1609.

In step S1609, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S1609: NO), the flow proceeds to step S1610 to determine whether the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

If it is determined in step S1610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S1610: YES), the flow advances to step S1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electric power combination opening/closing control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that it is the open/close execution mode (S1609: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step S1610 (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electric power combination opening/closing control process is ended.

<Processing for standby>
Next, the standby process will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 18: S509).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the standby process. In step S1701, it is determined whether the standby state flag is ON. When it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is ON (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S1701: NO), this standby process is ended.

In step S1702, it is determined whether 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0. If the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on. To determine. If it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on, the process advances to step S1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on, the standby process is ended.

In step S1703, the standby state flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1704 to turn on the transition condition satisfaction flag. After that, the process advances to step S1705 to set a transition condition satisfaction command. The transition condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to recognize that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state was started, that is, the transition condition was satisfied. After executing step S1705, the standby process ends.

A6. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that a part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in various areas of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, the production operation buttons 24, the speaker 46, various lamps 47 are connected, and the display control device 100 is connected.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound/light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound-light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802.

In step S1802, command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, standby state transition processing for reducing the audio output level (volume) in the standby state and starting a demo movie is executed. Details of the standby state transition processing will be described later. After executing step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804.

In step S1804, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step S1802. After executing step S1804, the process advances to step S1805.

In step S1805, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step S1802. After executing step S1805, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 32: S1802).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command corresponding process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1901, it is determined whether a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1901 that the startup command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1902, and the startup command handling process is executed. Details of the startup command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the startup command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: NO), step S1902 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S1903.

In step S1903, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: YES), the process proceeds to step S1904 and the hold command handling process is executed. Details of the hold command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: NO), step S1904 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command are not received (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1906, effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect, a reach effect, a stop design, a variable display pattern, etc., to be executed in the current game time are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1907, it is determined whether the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1907: YES), the flow advances to step S1908 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step S1909.

In step S1909, opening/closing execution mode effect setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode effect setting process, the contents of the effect to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode are set based on the information on the number of rounds and the jackpot type information included in the opening command. After executing step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910.

If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received (S1907: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910 without executing steps S1908 and S1909.

In step S1910, it is determined whether a condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1910: YES), the flow advances to step S1911, and the sound/light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound/light RAM 94 is stored. Turn on the side condition satisfaction flag. After executing step S1911, the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command has not been received (S1910: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912 without executing step S1911.

In step S1912, it is determined whether an effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1912: YES), the flow proceeds to step S1913, and the sounds stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 are stored. Turn on the light side effect duplication flag. After executing step S1913, the process proceeds to step S1914. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command has not been received (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1914 without executing step S1913.

In step S1914, it is determined whether the ending command is received. If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has been received (S1914: YES), the flow advances to step S1915 to execute ending effect setting processing. In the ending effect setting process, the contents of the ending effect in the ending period are set based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON/OFF information of the sound-light side condition satisfaction flag. is there. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1915, the process proceeds to step S1920.

When it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has not been received (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1916 without executing step S1915.

In step S1916, it is determined whether a transition condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: YES), the flow advances to step S1917 to turn on the volume reduction flag. The volume reduction flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, and is turned on at the timing of starting the process of reducing the output level (volume) of the voice, and at the timing when the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero. This is a flag that is turned off. After executing step S1917, the process proceeds to step S1918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: NO), the process proceeds to step S1918 without executing step S1917.

In step S1918, it is determined whether a return condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: YES), the process proceeds to step S1919, and the return condition satisfaction flag is set to ON. The return condition satisfaction flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, and is turned on when starting the process of returning the audio output level (volume) or the process of ending the demo video, and outputs the audio output level (volume). This is a flag that is turned off when the volume) is restored and the demo movie is finished. After executing step S1919, the process proceeds to step S1920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: NO), the process proceeds to step S1920 without executing step S1919.

In step S1920, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, effect contents corresponding to the high frequency support mode command, the low frequency support mode command, the opening command and the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S1920, the processing corresponding to this command ends.

<Startup command processing>
Next, the startup command handling process will be described. The startup command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1902).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the startup command handling process. As described above, the startup command handling process is a process executed when the startup command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the startup command handling processing will be described below.

In step S2001, a demo movie start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The demo moving image start command is a command for causing the display-side MPU 102 to start displaying the demo moving image. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts the process for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, the demo movie display flag is turned on. The demo video displaying flag is a flag indicating that the demo video is being displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is turned on when the display of the demo video is started and turned off when the display of the demo video is finished. It is a flag that is set. After executing step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2003, the cue determination flag is turned on. As described above, the cue determination flag starts output and display from the temporal start position of the background music and the background video when the return condition is satisfied and the output of the background music and the display of the background video are started. This is a flag for determining whether or not. If the cue determination flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is satisfied, when the background music is output and the background video is displayed, the output and the display are started from the temporal start position of the background music and the background video. To do. After executing step S2003, the main startup command handling process is ended.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1904).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step S2101, the update process at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of holding information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, the number of holding information acquired based on winning of the second starting opening 34, and these holdings A process for allowing the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update processing at the time of winning in step S2101 will be described later. In the following, the number of holding information items obtained based on winning in the first starting port 33 is also referred to as “first holding number”, and the number of holding information items obtained based on winning in the second starting port 34 is It is also referred to as “second reserved number”, and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

In step S2102, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of holding information items acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 identified in step S2101, and the number of holding information items acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34. The display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled based on the above. After executing step S2102, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process at the time of winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the sound light is emitted. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in each counter area 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. After executing step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2204.

When it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command that is the current read target is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33 (S2201: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening. If it is determined that the data is transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the update processing of the second holding number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. .. The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command that is the current read target. After executing step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204.

The reason why the processing in steps S2202 and S2203 is performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is shut off in a situation where the hold information related to winning in the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 displays the hold information. While stored and held, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of holding information is zero. In this case, if the voice emission control device 90 employs a configuration in which the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area is incremented each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually stores the hold There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends a hold command each time the hold command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained quantity to be contained is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In step S2204, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the quantity of the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the quantity of the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update process, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing step S2204, the update process at the time of final winning is completed.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1906) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game time. .. The specific process of the effect setting process will be described below.

In step S2301, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from this command, information on the presence/absence of a big hit, the kind of big hit, the presence/absence of a reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2302 that the sound/light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2303.

In step S2303, effect type setting processing is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S2303 is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game time. The effect type setting process will be described later. After executing step S2303, the process advances to step S2304.

In step S2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot, if the same symbol on the active line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the stop symbol information of this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead of this, the former selects more than the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the “7” symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot. If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach occurrence is not supported, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2304, the process advances to step S2305.

In step S2305, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the variation time and the information of the stop symbol identified in step S2304 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step S2306.

In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game number has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big hit is determined based on the received variation command. When it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game number has been won (S2306: YES), the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game is stored. Specifically, the setting content in the effect setting process of step S2303 is stored. This processing is performed in order to reproduce the effect in the game times that is won in the big hit lottery. After executing step S2307, the process advances to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game number has not been won (S2306: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2307.

When it is determined in step S2302 that the sound/light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to case a2 described in FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2308.

In step S2308, the information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process relating to the previous game time is read. Then, it progresses to step S2309.

In step S2309, effect type setting processing is executed based on the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern information read in step S2308. That is, the same effect as the effect executed in the previous game is set. Then, it progresses to step S2310.

In step S2310, the stop symbol setting process is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern information read in step S2308. That is, the stop symbol having the same content as the stop symbol displayed in the previous game time is set. Then, it progresses to step S2311.

In step S2311, a variable display pattern setting process is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern information read in step S2308. That is, the variable display pattern having the same content as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game time is set. Then, it progresses to step S2312.

In step S2312, the effect command, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern information set in the current game time are set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S2313, and the effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After performing step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314, after performing the update process at the start of fluctuation, the effect setting process ends. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The updating process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2314) of the effect setting process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the update process at the start of fluctuation. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. When it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2402, and the first reserved number counter stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is set. Subtract one. Then, it progresses to step S2404.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403, and the second hold number stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. Decrement the counter by 1. Then, it progresses to step S2404.

In step S2404, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

<Opening effect setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1908) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2501 that the sound/light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2502.

In step S2502, a normal start effect is set as the opening effect. In the present embodiment, as described in the case a2 of FIG. 9, as the opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect to be executed only in a special case such as a specific start effect (see FIG. 10C) is prepared. doing. In step S2502, a start effect (normal start effect) executed in a case other than the special case such as the case a2 is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2505.

When it is determined in step S2501 that the sound/light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2503, the flow advances to step S2504 to turn off the sound-light side condition satisfaction flag. Then, it progresses to step S2505.

In step S2505, the opening effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S2502 or step S2503. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received opening effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2505, the present opening effect setting process ends.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1915) of the command corresponding process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2601, it is determined whether the sound-light side effect duplication flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2601 that the sound/light side effect duplication flag is not ON (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2602 that the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2602: NO), the process proceeds to step S2603. That is, when it is determined that the effect (indication effect, special game state reproduction effect and specific end effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game turn of case a1 in FIG. 9 is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2603. move on.

In step S2603, the information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 37) is read. Then, it progresses to step S2604.

In step S2604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read in step S2603. After that, proceeding to step S2605, the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect are set as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special game state after the first game in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. Then, it progresses to step S2609.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the sound/light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2602: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2606. That is, when it is determined that the effect (indication effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game time of the case a2 in FIG. 9 is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2606.

In step S2606, the suggestive effect is set as the ending effect. Then, it progresses to step S2609.

When it is determined in step S2601 that the sound-light side effect duplication flag is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2607. That is, when it is determined that the effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the second game turn in case a2 of FIG. 9 is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is over. Then, it progresses to step S2608.

In step S2608, the sound-light side effect duplication flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S2609.

In step S2609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect contents set in step S2605, step S2606, or step S2607 is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received ending effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2609, the ending effect setting process is ended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when executing the special game state reproduction effect, as shown in steps S2603 to S2605 and S2609, the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time are shown. The voice light emission control device 90 stores the information, and when executing the special game state reproduction effect, a command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed again in the first game time is part of the ending command. As a result, the sound emission control device 90 sends the display control device 100 to display an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives a command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time from the sound emission control device 90 as a part of the ending command, the MPU 102 receives the command. The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern indicated by the command is read from the program ROM 103 and written in the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at the timing of image update when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current game on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing in the effect for game play this time is defined.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the information group corresponding to each frame and gives a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in order to display an image for one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 according to a drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the symbol display device 41 to display the image. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. MPU102 of the display control device 100, for the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, by sequentially issuing a drawing instruction to the VDP105, the effect type and the stop symbol executed in the first game time. The variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above-described process, but in addition, as the process of executing the special game state reproduction effect, in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, You may employ the process of. For example, as in the present embodiment, instead of the process of storing the information indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time in the sound emission control device 90, the sound emission control device 90 displays the information. A command for instructing to temporarily store the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time is transmitted to the control device 100. The display control device 100 temporarily stores the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time according to the command.

After that, when executing the special game state reproduction effect, the voice emission control device 90 outputs to the display control device 100 a command indicating that the VDP 105 is to be instructed to draw in accordance with the temporarily stored pattern data table. .. The display control device 100 can execute the special game state reproduction effect by giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 according to the command data table that is temporarily stored according to the command. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the process for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Standby state transition process>
Next, the standby state transition process will be described. The standby state transition process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S1803) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the standby state shift processing. In step S2701, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether the demo movie display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2702 that the demo movie display flag is not ON (S2702: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that the demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S2702: YES), the standby state shifting process ends.

In step S2703, it is determined whether the demo movie start waiting flag is ON. The demo video start wait flag is a flag for specifying in the audio emission control device 90 that the demo video is waiting to start, and is turned on when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. The flag is set to OFF at the timing when 5 seconds elapse after the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero and the return condition is not satisfied. If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo movie start waiting flag is not ON (S2703: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2704.

In step S2704, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2704: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2704: NO), the standby state transition process ends.

In step S2705, a process of reducing the output level (volume) of voice is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 steps, and the processing of lowering the audio output level by one step is executed. In the present embodiment, the standby state transition processing is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, so that the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing step S2705, the process advances to step S2706.

In step S2706, it is determined whether the audio output level (volume) has become zero. When it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S2706: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2707, the volume reduction flag is turned off, and the flow proceeds to step S2708 to wait for the start of the demo video. Turn on the flag. Then, it progresses to step S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S2706: NO), the standby state transition process ends.

In step S2709, a demo movie start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set in the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94b. The demo movie start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the output level (volume) of the sound becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. It After executing step S2709, the present standby state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo movie start waiting flag is ON (S2703: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2710.

In step S2710, it is determined whether the demo video start waiting period of 5 seconds has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, and if the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, the demo video start waiting period of 5 seconds ends. It is judged that it did. If it is determined in step S2710 that the demo movie start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2710 that the demo movie start waiting period has not ended, the standby state transition process ends.

In step S2711, background music output stop processing is executed. After that, the process advances to step S2712, and a demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts the process for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2712, the process proceeds to step S2713.

In step S2713, the demo movie start waiting flag is turned off, and in step S2714, the demo movie display flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S2715, the cue determination flag is set to ON, and this standby state transition processing ends.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2701: YES), the flow advances to step S2716 to determine whether the cue determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S2716: NO), the flow advances to step S2717 to restore the audio output level (volume) to a value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2717, the process advances to step S2718.

In step S2718, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2718: YES), the flow advances to step S2719 to turn off the volume reduction flag. Then, it progresses to step S2720. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2718: NO), step S2719 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S2720.

In step S2720, it is determined whether the demo movie start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2720 that the demo video start wait is ON (S2720: YES), the flow advances to step S2721 to turn off the demo video start wait flag. After that, the process advances to step S2722, and the return condition satisfaction flag is turned off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the demo movie start waiting flag is not ON (S2720: NO), the process proceeds to step S2722 without executing step S2721, and the return condition satisfaction flag is turned off. After executing step S2722, the present standby state transition processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is ON (S2716: YES), the flow advances to step S2723 to send a demo movie end command to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image end command executes processing for ending the display of the demo moving image. After executing step S2723, the flow advances to step S2724 to turn off the demo movie display flag. Then, it progresses to step S2725.

In step S2725, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts the process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. Then, it progresses to step S2726.

In step S2726, the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2726, the process proceeds to step S2727.

In step S2727, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cue determination flag is ON, the output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the process advances to step S2728 to turn off the cue determination flag. After that, the process advances to step S2729, the return condition satisfaction flag is turned off, and this standby state transition processing ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the voice light emission control device 90 and a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to command reception and V interrupt signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice light emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed as it is until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S2801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step S2802.

In step S2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2901, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the inside is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S3001, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 43), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the drawing and display control of the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect display mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (S3001), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 millisecond. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41. Details of the command handling process will be described later.

In step S3002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S3001) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step S3003.

In step S3003, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (S3002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step S3004.

In step S3004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information and, together with the drive signal, displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3005 to execute other processes, and then ends the V interrupt process.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a V interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 44: S3001).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. In step S3101, it is determined whether an effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. When it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, and display start processing of the effect corresponding to the effect command is executed. Specifically, the control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3103 without executing step S3102.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the opening effect display start process corresponding to the opening effect command is executed. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the opening effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Further, after the opening effect is finished, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the opening/closing execution mode effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is not stored, step S3104 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, it is determined whether the ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. When it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3106, and the ending effect display start processing corresponding to the ending effect command is executed. Specifically, the control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode specified by the ending effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 without executing step S3106.

In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3107 that the demo moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3108 to execute demo moving image display start processing. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the demo moving image designated by the demo moving image start command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the present embodiment, the display of the demo moving image is repeated until the demo moving image end command described later is received. After executing step S3108, the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the demo moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3109 without executing step S3108.

In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image end command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3109 that the demo moving image end command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3110, and processing for ending the display of the demo moving image is executed. Then, it progresses to step S3111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3109 that the demo moving image end command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3111 without executing step S3110.

In step S3111, it is determined whether or not the background moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112 to execute processing for starting display of the background moving image. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112.

In step S3113, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and the process corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the above-mentioned production operation command is stored, the processing when the above-mentioned production operation command is stored is executed. After that, the processing corresponding to this command ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is missed, as in case a1, the notice effect and the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect are generated. And the result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time, and the player recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces the already executed effect. On the other hand, as in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are already executed in terms of effect. Although it is executed as an effect to reproduce the effect, it is actually a game time reproduction effect that is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. When the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 is being watched first, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to anticipate winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game time, while recognizing that it is merely reproduction of the effect. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game time, the result notification effect notifies that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game time are not reproductions of the effects executed in the first game time, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery for the times. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in case a2 in this way, the game is given a surprising effect and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the effect. In addition, by making the second game times in case a2 unpredictable by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested that the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to expect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won. Therefore, it is possible to further give the game unexpectedness.

Further, in case a2, when the big hit lottery related to the second game time is won, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed, but actually, Is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Therefore, as a case where the reach effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, and a case where it is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect, In terms of performance, it is executed as a reproduction of the performance that has already been executed, but in reality, at least three cases are set, including the case of being executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest, and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and at the time of outputting the background music, from the predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes depending on the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11 ), the display control device 100. Starts the display from the temporal start position "01" of the background moving image, and the audio emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started at a position midway in time and the output of the background music is started at a position midway in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a temporally middle position of the background video and the output is started from a temporally middle position of the background music, the player, after the return condition is satisfied, Since the background moving image and the background music are to be viewed from a position midway in time, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or feels unsatisfactory because there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that is not being listened to. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position, so that it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the background moving image and the background music can be enjoyed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode in which the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, so that While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, the mode before the transition condition is satisfied can be restored in a natural flow without a feeling of discomfort.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13 ), the display control device 100 continues the mode in which the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music. It is possible to return in a natural flow without feeling uncomfortable with the mode before the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the game time is over, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds elapse without starting any of the special game state and the next game time, so the game is executed. It is possible to reduce the volume of background music with the passage of time in a state in which it is highly possible that a person is not playing a game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game time is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and the background music is played. Since the output mode is restored to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player, the expectation that the game time has started can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In case a2 shown in FIG. 9B of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game time, and the first game time is given. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the and the second game times are continuous has been described.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as a case b1 shown in FIG. 46(a), the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game time. A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time (hereinafter also referred to as a preceding game time) exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described. The jackpot lottery in the preceding game times is out.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. In the special game state, the opening effect, the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending effect are executed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state after the first game, the opening effect suggests the start of the special game state (normal opening effect), and the ending effect suggests the end of the special game state. Execute ending production (normal ending production). That is, unlike the case a2 in FIG. 9B, the suggestive effect is not executed as the ending effect in the special game state.

When the special game state ends, the preceding game times are executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game time.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the symbol display device 41 when executing the suggestive effect in the preceding game time. As shown in the figure, when the suggestive effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, variable display and stop display of symbols are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the variable display of the symbol is executed in the variable time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, the suggestive effect is executed. In this way, by displaying the variable display and the stop display of the symbols in the small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness in the preceding game times. Further, the variable display and the stop display of the symbols may not be displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined mark or character displayed in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the symbols may be blinked and lit. .. Even in this case, the suggestion effect can be executed in the preceding game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time after executing the preceding game time. As described above, in the example shown in the case b1 of FIG. 46(a), the jackpot lottery is won also in the second game time. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as the effect in the second game time, a game time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time. That is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (big hit notification) executed in the first game time are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (big hit notification) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect, and also has a function as a result notification about the big hit lottery of the second game time. Then, with the end of the game time reproduction effect, the second game time is ended.

Since the jackpot lottery is won in the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the second game time is over. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect in a subsequent special game state when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is a win and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

The second embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following processing.

When the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the effect executed in the first game time (in the present embodiment, a notice is given in the same manner as the process executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 37: S2307)). Effects, reach effects, and result announcement effects) are stored. The content to be stored is not limited to the effect itself executed in the first game time, and may be other information as long as it is information that can specify the effect executed in the first game time. That is, the effect executed in the first game time, such as the information indicating the type (pattern) of the effect executed in the first game time, the address information of the memory in which the effect executed in the first game time is stored, and the like. Information that can be called again.

After memorizing the effect executed in the first game time, the game determination executed after the first game time, which is a game time executed after the first game time, and which is won in the jackpot lottery (second game time) is specified by the determination process. Then, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect in the first game time that are stored are executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time. At that time, for example, by setting the variation times to be the same for all the game times won in the jackpot lottery, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game time can be set to the second effect. It can be executed within a variable time in the game game.

If there is a preceding game time between the first game time and the second game time, the present embodiment is realized by executing a suggestion effect according to the variation time of each preceding game time. can do. Further, when there are a plurality of preceding game times, a suggestive effect may be executed according to each variable time in each preceding game time, for example, a preceding game time executed immediately before the second game time. The suggested effect may be executed only in, and the normal effect may be executed in the other preceding game times.

In addition, the number of preceding game times is not limited to one, and when a plurality of preceding game times continuously exist between the first game time and the second game time, the number of preceding game times is the first game time. You may set the upper limit of the number of game times permitted as the preceding game times between the second game times.

FIG. 46(b) is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when a plurality of preceding game times continuously exist between the first game time and the second game time. As shown in the figure, for example, when there are five or less preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out after winning the big hit lottery in the first game time (FIG. 46(b )) After that, in the second game time that wins the jackpot lottery, when the game time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time is executed, and the preceding game time is six times or more (Not shown), after that, the game time reproduction effect may not be executed in the second game time when the jackpot lottery is won. As the processing, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the same effect as the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 46: S2307) is performed in the first game time (this embodiment). In the above, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect) are stored in the sound-light side RAM 94.

In addition, when a preceding game time counter that counts the number of preceding game times between the first game time and the second game time is provided, and when determining the effect of the second game time to win the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game time counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. When the counter value is 5 or less, the effect executed in the first game time is read from the sound-light side RAM 94, and the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time. When the reproduction effect is executed and the counter value is 6 or more, the usual big jackpot effect is executed in the second game time. By doing so, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. Further, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game time. Specifically, the preceding determination process determines the preceding game time immediately before the second game time, and determines to execute the suggestion effect in the preceding game time. Then, at the timing when the variation time of the preceding game time is determined, a suggestion effect corresponding to the variation time of the preceding game time is selected and executed. By doing so, even when a plurality of preceding game times continuously exist between the first game time and the second game time, it is possible to execute the game time reproduction effect. it can. In this description, in the case where there are 6 or more preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of the preceding game times after the first game time in which the big hit lottery is won, , After that, the game number reproduction effect is not executed in the second game time to win the jackpot lottery, but the number of the preceding game times (threshold value) that is determined not to execute the game time reproduction effect is limited to six. No, it can be set to any number.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, another game time is performed. By executing the suggestion effect in the game, the suggestion effect and the game time reproduction effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Further, even when there are a plurality of other game times (preceding game times) between the first game time and the second game time, a suggestive effect according to the variation time of each preceding game time is produced. By executing the game, the game time reproduction effect can be executed in the second game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 48 is a time chart illustrating a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect, at least a part of the effect executed in the game time before the first game time (FIG. 48: first preceding game time) is reproduced. In addition, a case where at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced will be described. In the present description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case c1 and case c2, as an example.

FIG. 48(a) shows a case c1 in which the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and is missed in the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. Shows the processing performed by. As shown in the figure, before the first game time to win the big hit lottery, there is a first preceding game time where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), in case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game time and the first game time. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is an effect that gives advance notice of winning the jackpot lottery in the first game time. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

The result notification effect in the first preceding game time when the continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 47 described above. In the display area 41aS of the display surface 41a, variable display and stop display of symbols are executed. .. Specifically, in the unit game time, the variable display of the symbol is executed in the variable time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, continuous effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute a series of continuous effects from the first preceding game time to the first game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

As shown in FIG. 48A, after the result notification effect (big hit notification) is executed in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, a continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and a result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are reproduced and executed. To do. When the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a when the special game state reproduction effect is executed are actually displayed in the first game time. Some of the contents are different from the design.

The pachinko machine 10 executes the special game state reproduction effect, and then executes the specific end effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time. The jackpot lottery for the second game is out. The pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect and a result notice effect (disappearance notice) in the second game time.

Next, the case c2 shown in FIG. 48B will be described. In the case c2, as in the case c1, before the first game time to win the big hit lottery, there is a first preceding game time in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out. Further, in case c2, there is a second preceding game time in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out before the second game time in which the big hit lottery is won.

Similarly to case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game time and the first game time. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

After executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

In the case of case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestive effect during the ending period. Then, the game times reproduction effect is executed over the second preceding game times and the second game times. In the case c2, as the game time reproduction effect, a continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and a result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are executed.

After the end of the second game, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening/closing execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

The third embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following specific processing.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 96 always stores the effects executed in the four game times that have already been executed. Then, each time a winning is generated in the first starting opening 33, the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times executed by the winning is grasped by the preceding determination process.

As a result of the preceding determination process, when it is understood that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game time is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game time, which is held one before the first game time, is held. When the result is out of order, the continuous effect is executed over the first preceding game time and the first game time.

Then, when there are two or more holding game times after the first game time by the end of the first game time, the result of the jackpot lottery of the two game times is grasped by the preceding determination process, When the results of the big hit lottery of the two game times are both out of sequence, case c1 is executed. That is, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the game number to be executed first is out of the two game times and the result of the jackpot lottery of the game number to be executed later is a jackpot, case c2 is executed. .. That is, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time, and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second preceding game time and the second game time.

In case c2, if the second preceding game time does not exist, that is, if the jackpot lottery in the game time executed after the special game state after the first game time is a big hit, the second game time In, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time may be executed as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, when the variation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to reproduce all the continuous effects, only a part of the continuous effects may be reproduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, it is a case where a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time. Also, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect, the continuous effects can be reproduced. Further, by using the processing of the case c1 and the processing of the case c2 together, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the continuous effect.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
FIG. 49 is a time chart illustrating a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game time when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out is executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time executed after the first game time. In the present description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case d1 and case d2, as an example.

FIG. 49(a) shows a case d1 in which the pachinko machine 10 loses the jackpot lottery in the first game round and wins the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. It shows the processing to be performed. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect in the first game time. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that indicates to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 gives a notice of deviation in the result notification effect.

After executing the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the game time reproduction effect, and the result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggestion effect, an effect that suggests reproducing the effect executed in the first game time, and also, as a game time reproduction effect, a notice effect and a reach effect executed in the first game time. Perform the performance. Also, as a result notice production, a big hit notice is given.

After executing the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect as the opening effect. Further, as the ending effect, a normal ending effect is executed.

Next, the case d2 will be described. Case d2 is, as shown in FIG. 49(b), missed in the jackpot lottery in the first game round and further missed in the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. , A process executed by the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, in the first game time, a notice effect and a reach effect are executed. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that indicates to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 gives a notice of deviation in the result notification effect.

After executing the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the game time reproduction effect, and the result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggestion effect, an effect that suggests reproducing the effect executed in the first game time, and also, as a game time reproduction effect, a notice effect and a reach effect executed in the first game time. Perform the performance. In addition, as a result notification presentation, a deviation notification is given.

The fourth embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following specific processing.

Whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the suspended game number is held is determined by executing the previous determination process each time a prize is placed in the first starting opening 33. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery in the game times that are held two or more ahead is won, the game times that are won in the jackpot lottery (corresponding to the second game times in case d1). The notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the game time (corresponding to the first game time) that is held immediately before, and the executed notice effect and the reach effect are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed notice effect and the reach effect itself, but may be any other information as long as the executed notice effect and the reach effect can be read again. Good.

The pachinko machine 10 executes the reach effect in the first game time, and then performs the disengagement notification as the result notification effect. After that, in the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed, and the stored notice effect and reach effect are executed as the game time reproduction effect. Further, the specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game time is realized by executing the same process as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. The case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized by executing such processing.

Further, the case d2 is executed first of the two reserved game times when there are two consecutive game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is missed by executing the destination determination process. It can be realized by executing the reach effect in the game time to be performed, and in the game time to be executed later, to reproduce the suggestion effect and the notice effect and the reach effect executed in the previous game time as the game time reproduction effect. .. In this case, in the second game time, the variation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, for example, part or all of the notice effect executed as the game time reproduction effect may be omitted according to the variation time of the second game time.

On the other hand, in the second game time, when the variation time of the second game time is longer than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. In addition, for example, the execution time of the suggestive effect may be set to be long depending on the variation time of the second game time. Necessary for suggestion production and game time reproduction production by preparing multiple types of suggestion production corresponding to the time required for production and selecting the optimal suggestion production according to the variation time of the second game time. And the variable time of the second game time can be the same.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won by executing the process of the case d1. Since the effect executed in the first game time in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of order is executed in the second game time as the game time reproduction effect, the big hit lottery related to the second game time is won. It is difficult for the player to expect that. In addition, before executing the game time reproduction effect, by executing the suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the effect in the first game time which is out of the jackpot lottery, the first game is executed in the second game time. It is possible to further give the player the recognition that the effect executed in the game is only reproduced. Then, it is possible to let the player recognize that the big hit lottery related to the second game time is won, only after the notification means notifies the lottery result of the big hit lottery related to the second game time, which is surprising to the game. It is possible to impart sex. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, by executing the process of case d2, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is also missed, Since the game time reproduction effect is executed, it is possible to give the player recognition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the game times for which the game time reproduction effect is executed is not necessarily a jackpot. As a result, when the game time reproduction effect is executed, the player's emotional feeling and expectation are given to the player, and the player's attention to the game times in which the effect already executed is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. Fifth embodiment (an example of effect type setting processing):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of processing executed in the effect type setting processing (FIG. 37: S2303) described in the first embodiment will be described. The effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect executed in the game game in the sound emission control device 90 (sound-light side MPU 92). In this description, first, an outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the processing will be described using a flowchart.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of effect type setting processing. When the sound-light side MPU 92 starts the effect type setting process, the display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter for object C are used to determine the content of the notice effect. A counter value is acquired at a predetermined timing from each random number counter of C13.

Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used for determining how to combine a plurality of object images forming the notice effect in each game time. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the count value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

In the present embodiment, the notice effect at each game time is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for object C are random numbers for determining the display modes of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, how to combine these three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the display timing are determined and set as the notice effect. Here, the three types of object images forming the notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A that is an object image forming the notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object A shows the behavior of a character expressing a person, and is composed of three images of an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3. 51A shows the image A1, FIG. 51B shows the image A2, and FIG. 51C shows the image A3. The object A is an image that changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, is displayed as a moving object image, and One of the images A1, A2, and A3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B which is an object image forming the notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images B1, B2, and B3. 52(a) shows the image B1, FIG. 52(b) shows the image B2, and FIG. 52(c) shows the image B3. The object B is an image that changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, is displayed as a moving object image, and One of the images B1, B2, and B3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C that is an object image forming the notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object C shows the behavior of the dog in the box, and is composed of three images C1, C2, and C3. 53(a) shows the image C1, FIG. 53(b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 53(c) shows the image C3. The object C is an image that changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, a case where the object C is displayed as a moving object image, and One of the images C1, C2, and C3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

As described above, in the effect type setting process in the present embodiment, the notice effect is set by combining the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53.

The description returns to FIG. When acquiring the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table for object A, the display pattern table for object B, and the display pattern table for object C to display each display pattern random number counter. Collation with each counter value acquired from C11 to C13 is executed to determine a display pattern for each object.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for the object A has a big hit when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, a case where the result of the big hit lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed (“out (with reach)”), a big hit It is divided into three cases where the result of the lottery is out and the reach effect is not executed (“out of reach (no reach)”. And in each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 In the present embodiment, as the display pattern of the object A, a pattern in which the object A is not displayed (non-display) and a pattern in which only the image A1 is displayed ( A1), a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying the image A1 and the image A2, and a pattern (A1-A2-A3) for sequentially displaying the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 are set in advance.

When setting the notice effect in a predetermined game time, the sound-light side MPU 92 confirms whether the game time corresponds to a big hit, out (reach), or out (no reach). Then, in the display pattern table, the corresponding portion of the game time is referred to. For example, when the game number is a big hit, the “big hit” column of the display pattern table is referred to. Then, the display pattern is determined by collating with the acquired value of the display pattern random number counter C11.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, the method of assigning a random number value to each display pattern is different in each of the cases of big hit, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed in the case of a big hit, the frequency displayed in the case of out (reach), and the frequency displayed in the case of out (no reach). Is different from. That is, the display probability of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is higher in the order of big hit, out (with reach), and out (without reach). On the contrary, the probability of displaying the display pattern (A1) is high in the order of out (no reach), out (reach), and jackpot. Therefore, in the notice production at the game time, the probability of being a big hit is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed than when only the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) It is set so that the probability of being a big hit is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than when is displayed. That is, the effect produced by the object A indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player by suggesting the probability of the jackpot of the game times, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot to the player (hereinafter, expectation level). (Also referred to as )).

In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the objects A, B, and C is different in the method of allocating the random number value in each case of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). The jackpot expectations shown by the step-up effect of object A, the jackpot expectations shown by the step-up effect of object B, and the jackpot expectations shown by the step-up effect of object C are different from each other. For example, in the object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for the object B is set so that it is not displayed in the game times when the object is out (without reach) and is displayed in the case of out (with reach) and jackpot. It may be distributed. Specifically, in the display pattern for the object B, when it is out (no reach), it can be realized by setting to "non-display" in all cases of the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99. By doing so, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed and the jackpot expectation degree when the object A and the object B are displayed can be made different. That is, in each of the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C, the method of allocating the random number values in the cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach) is set differently, In addition to the step-up mode of each object image, the expectation level of the jackpot can be expressed by the presence or absence of the display of each object. By doing so, the degree of attention of the player to the object image can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C is divided into three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach). However, for example, the jackpots in the display pattern table of the object B are further classified into 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, and the effect by the object B is expected to be a jackpot. You may make it function as a step-up production which shows a degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which there is a latent probability change state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode), the effect produced by the object C is the expectation of the probability change state of the current game time. You may make it function as a step-up production which shows. As described above, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (for example, jackpot expectation or The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game, such as the probability of probability variation jackpot) may be indicated.

As shown in FIG. 50, the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the display pattern for the object A, the object B, and the object C, and then arranges each object in order to display the combined objects on the display surface 41a. The position and the display timing of each object are set. Specifically, the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the arrangement position of each object and the display timing by referring to the arrangement/timing setting table set in advance.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement/timing setting table. As shown in the drawing, the arrangement/timing setting table starts displaying on the display object determined to be displayed, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each displayed object on the display surface 41a, and the display surface 41a of each object. The timing and the timing are set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the process using the random number counter is, for example, the display pattern (A1-A2) for the object A, the display pattern (non-display) for the object B, and the display pattern (C1-C2-) for the object C. In the case of C3), since the displayed objects are the object A and the object C, refer to “A/C” in the left column of the arrangement/timing setting table. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the placement/timing setting table, the placement coordinates of the objects A and C are such that the center coordinates of the object A are located at (Xa2, Ya2) on the display surface 41a for the object A. The object C is set so that the center coordinates of the object C are located at (Xc1, Yc1) on the display surface 41a. Further, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement/timing setting table, the display of the object A starts ta2 seconds after the game time starts, and the display of the object C starts after the game time starts. The display is set to start after 1 second from tc.

The coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement/timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object may be set to change with time. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is Arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement/timing setting table are set so as not to overlap each other.

In the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions of the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are related to each other on the display surface 41a. In the arrangement/timing setting table, the arrangement of display objects (relative arrangement position between objects) and the display start timing (relative timing between objects) are set. Further, the arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement/timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period do not overlap each other.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a notice effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example of FIG. 56 shows a case where the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table of FIG. 55 change with time. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 56(a), FIG. 56(b), and FIG. 56(c). FIG. 56 shows a notice effect in which the object A, the object B, and the object C are combined, and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed for the object A and the display pattern (B1-B2) is displayed for the object B. -B3) is displayed, and the notice pattern is set so that the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed for the object C.

In the notice production shown in FIG. 56, a person walking on a sunny day finds a box, notices that there is a dog in the box as the weather gradually worsens, and tells a story of giving an umbrella to the dog. It is expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions of the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are related to each other. Further, the display object arrangement and the display start timing in the arrangement/timing setting table are set so that the display surface 41a is displayed in a manner having a story. By doing so, the notice effect executed by displaying a plurality of types of object images in the same period can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and has a narrative effect to improve the game. The interest can be improved.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56(c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a without an image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, the object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character expressing a person, and a process of displaying only a layer image showing a character expressing a person. Is running. By doing so, the effect in which the plurality of object images are displayed can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed without displaying the image frame, but the image A1 displayed as the display pattern (A1-A2-A3), The image frames of part or all of the images A2 and A3 may not be displayed. Also, similar processing may be executed for other object images.

The sound-light side MPU 92 thus sets the arrangement position of each object and the display timing of each object, and sets the notice effect.

Next, the effect type setting process described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect type setting process. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 37: S2303) of the effect setting process.

In step S3201, each counter value is acquired from each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13. After that, the process advances to step S3202, and it is confirmed whether the game time for which the notice effect is set is a big hit, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). After executing step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

In step S3203, each display pattern table for the objects A to C is referenced to determine the display pattern of each object. Then, it progresses to step S3204.

In step S3204, when the display pattern is set for each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the notice effect of the game time. That is, it is determined whether or not the display patterns of all the objects A to C are “non-display”.

In step S3204, when it is determined that the object display is not absent (non-display) in the notice effect in the game time (S3204: NO), the process proceeds to step S3205, and the placement/timing setting table is referred to and displayed. The coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each object and the timing of starting the display on the display surface 41a are determined. Then, it progresses to step S3206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3204 that the object display is not present (non-display) in the notice effect for the game time (S3204: YES), the process proceeds to step S3206 without executing step S3205.

In step S3206, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display object, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing to start the display of each object are set as the notice effect in the game time. Then, it progresses to step S3207.

In step S3207, it is determined whether or not the game time is a big hit or a miss (reach existence). That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect after executing the notice effect in the game time.

When it is determined in step S3207 that the game times are a big hit or a miss (reach is present) (S3207: YES), the process proceeds to step S3208 and the reach effect setting process is executed. Then, it progresses to step S3209.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3207 that the game times are not a big hit or a miss (reach is present) (S3207: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 without executing step S3208.

In step S3209, the notice effect and the reach effect set in steps S3206 and S3208 are set as effect commands. Then, the setting process of the said effect type is complete|finished.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the objects are displayed as the notice effect in the same period, they are displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, so that the objects are the same. The effect performed by being displayed during the period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, each object may be displayed in the same period as other objects or may not be displayed in the same period (that is, each object may be displayed alone). The effect can be executed and the object can be effectively used.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, the respective object images are displayed in a mode having a narrative relationship, so that the plurality of object images are displayed in the same period. It is possible to make the effect executed by being displayed on the player a feeling that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, since the effect executed by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period has a narrative effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C are different in the way of distributing the random numbers in the cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game and the degree of expectation of the jackpot, which are shown by the step-up effect by the object images of the objects A, B, and C, are different from each other. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game is different depending on whether or not other objects are also displayed in the same period. Therefore, the degree of interest of the player to the effect, the degree of interest, Expectations can be improved.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the setting mode of the display pattern table, for example, the jackpots in the display pattern table of the object B are classified into 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot. By classifying into big hits, the effect produced by the object B can be made to function as a step-up effect showing the degree of expectation of the probability variation big hit. That is, the effect by each object can be made to function as an effect indicating the degree of advantage or disadvantage of different types of games. Therefore, each object can be used to indicate the degree of advantage or disadvantage of various types of games.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the respective object images are displayed in the same period, the relative positions between the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at predetermined arrangement positions, A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the arrangement and timing are set so that the objects are related to each other. Arrangement of display objects in the setting table and timing of display start are set. Further, the timing of the display object arrangement and the display start timing in the arrangement/timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, since each object image may be displayed in the same period and may not be displayed in the same period (that is, each object may be displayed alone), a plurality of effects are executed using each object image. Therefore, the object image can be effectively used.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, for example, the object A includes the display pattern (A1), the display pattern (A1-A2), and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3). ) May be displayed in three different display modes. Corresponding to each display mode, relative positions with respect to other object images (object B, object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be executed. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), the relative position between the object images is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position. Therefore, in each display mode, each object is displayed. The images are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, various effects executed by displaying each object image in the same period do not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the timing for starting display of each object on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the arrangement/timing setting table. Therefore, when the respective object images are displayed in the same period, the respective object images are displayed at a predetermined timing relative to each other, so that the respective object images are displayed at a timing having no relation to each other. Never. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since each object image is an image that changes over time (moving image in the present embodiment), various effects can be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of being a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object A is displayed as the notice effect, the probability of being a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object B is displayed as the notice effect, and the object C. The probability of being a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as a notice effect is different from each other. Furthermore, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery when the object images are combined and displayed as the notice effect is also different. By doing so, the degree of attention of the player to the object image can be improved.

F. Sixth embodiment (another example of effect type setting processing):
Next, as the sixth embodiment, another example of the effect type setting processing (FIG. 37: S2303) will be described. As described above, the effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect executed in the game game in the sound emission control device 90 (sound-light side MPU 92). In this description, first, an outline of the effect type setting process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described. After that, the details of the processing will be described using a flowchart.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the effect type setting processing in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the present embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above is the method of determining the type of object to be displayed as the notice effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of objects displayed in the notice effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of combinations of objects to be displayed in the notice effect are preset by the display object table, and the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays it. By comparing with the object table, the combination of objects to be displayed in the notice presentation is determined.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position and the display start timing of the object displayed in the notice effect are determined by the arrangement/timing setting table. The arrangement position of each object and the display start timing are set in advance corresponding to the display pattern. The details will be described below.

When the effect type setting process is started, the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0.

After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes the matching with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and displays the object to be displayed in the notice effect. Determine the combination.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display object table. As shown in the figure, in the display object table, a combination of the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and each object displayed as the notice effect is set in association with each other. For example, when the value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is 75, the objects A and C are set as the object images displayed in the notice effect. The display object table in the present embodiment is different in the method of allocating the value of the display object random number (the number of values to be allocated) to the combination of each object displayed as the notice effect. For example, when only the object A is displayed as the display object, the value of the display object random number is 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. When the object A and the object B are displayed, the value of the display object random number is 60 to 71, and 12 values are assigned. When the object A, the object B, and the object C are displayed, the value of the display object random number is 96 to 99, and four values are assigned. As described above, the number of display object random numbers assigned to each combination of objects is different, and thus the frequency of displaying each combination of objects as a notice effect is different.

The description returns to FIG. 58. After determining the combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect, the sound-light side MPU 92 next acquires a counter value from the display pattern random number counter C22 at a predetermined timing. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the previously determined combination of display objects, and collates with the acquired counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22. Is executed to determine a display pattern corresponding to the combination of the display objects. In FIG. 58, the case where it is determined that the object A and the object C are displayed as the combination of the objects displayed in the notice effect by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table is shown. In this case, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the AC display pattern table is divided into three cases, that is, a big hit, out (reach), and out (no reach). Then, for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the objects A and C are set in association with each other.

In the present embodiment, as a display pattern using the object A and the object C, a pattern in which neither the object A nor the object C is displayed (non-display), the image A1 of the object A and the image C1 of the object C are combined. The pattern (A1/C1) to be displayed, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are displayed in order, and the pattern C1 and the image C2 of the object C are displayed (A1-A2/C1-C2), the image of the object A. A display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) that sequentially displays A1 and the image A2 and sequentially displays the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3 of the object C is set. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the display start timing are set in advance for each display pattern, and the display pattern is determined to determine each object in the notice effect. The arrangement position and the display start timing are determined.

For example, when the game number is a big hit and it is determined that the object A and the object C are displayed as the combination of the objects displayed in the notice effect by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table. In, when the counter value acquired by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3).

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 61(a), FIG. 61(b), and 54(c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are sequentially displayed, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are sequentially displayed on the display surface 41a. As described above, in the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3), the arrangement positions of the images A1 and A2 of the object A and the display start timing, the images C1, C2, and C3 of the object C are displayed. Since the arrangement position and the display start timing are set in advance, the mode of the notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2/C1-C2-C3).

Although the display pattern table for AC has been described with reference to FIG. 60, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. Further, a plurality of types of display patterns are set for each display pattern table by combining the images of the objects.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the A display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for A, in the three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach), non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2), display pattern (A1) Four display patterns of (A2-A3) (see FIG. 51) are assigned. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for A has the highest display frequency of the display pattern (A1) among the above four display patterns in the case of deviation (without reach), and the case of deviation (with reach). The display pattern (A1-A2) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) among the above four display patterns is the most frequent. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency of display is high. By allocating the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player is more likely to see the image A2 displayed on the display surface 41a later than the image A1 displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery increases, and the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image A2 is displayed after the image A1 on the display surface 41a. Expectations for winning increase.

Next, the B display pattern table will be described.

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a B display pattern table. In the case of the B display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach), non-display, display pattern (B1-B2-B3), display pattern (B1-B2), Four display patterns of display pattern (B1) (see FIG. 52) are assigned. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for B has the highest frequency of display of the display patterns (B1-B2-B3) among the above-mentioned four display patterns in the case of deviation (no reach) and the deviation (reach). Yes), the display pattern (B1-B2) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B1) among the above four display patterns is the most frequent. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency of display is high. That is, by allocating the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, unlike the above-mentioned notice effect by the object A, the player is more likely to display the image B1 on the display surface 41a after that. When the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lowered, and after that, the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lower.

Next, the C display pattern table will be described.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a C display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for C, the non-display, the display pattern (C1), the display pattern (C1-C2), and the display pattern (C1) are provided in three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). Four display patterns (-C2-C3) (see FIG. 53) are assigned. As shown in the figure, the display pattern (C1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of detachment (without reach), and the above four display patterns in the case of detachment (with reach). Of the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. As described above, the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned. By allocating the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player is more likely to play the image C2 on the display surface 41a later than the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is higher, and the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image C2 is displayed after the image C1 on the display surface 41a. Expectations for winning increase.

Next, the AB display pattern table will be described.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an AB display pattern table. In the case of the AB display pattern table, the non-display, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3), and the display pattern (A1) are respectively set in three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). -A2-A3/B1) and four display patterns (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) are assigned. As shown in the figure, in the AB display pattern table, in the case of being out (without reach), the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed. , The display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) out of the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed in the case of deviation (with reach), and the display pattern among the above four display patterns in the case of a big hit. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 66(a), FIG. 66(b), and FIG. 66(c). As shown in the figure, the notice production expresses that a walking person gets wet while the weather changes from fine, cloudy, and rain.

When the image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 66(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and a bad impression is generally given. Since it is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 66B is displayed on the display surface 41a, a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy is expressed in the image. In general, it gives an impression that the image shown in FIG. 66(a) cannot be compared with the image shown in FIG. 66(a), and gives the player an advantage in the game situation compared with the image shown in FIG. 66(a). Gives unrecognizable recognition. Then, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 66(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who gets wet with rain is expressed in the image, which generally gives a bad impression. It gives the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) changes the recognition of the game situation to the disadvantageous recognition for the player as the notice effect is displayed.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 67(a), FIG. 67(b), and FIG. 67(c). As shown in the figure, the notice production expresses that the walking person notices that it is sunny and puts an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and a bad impression is generally given. Since it is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who notices that it is sunny is expressed in the image, and the image also includes Similar to the image of FIG. 67(a), generally, a bad impression is not given, and therefore, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67C is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who puts an umbrella to prevent sunburn is expressed in the image, which is generally bad. It does not give an impression and gives a not-unfavorable recognition of the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1) gives the player a recognition that it is difficult to determine whether the situation of the game is advantageous or disadvantageous even if the advance notice effect is displayed.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 68(a), FIG. 68(b), and FIG. 68(c). As shown in the figure, in the notice production, while the weather changed from sunny, cloudy, and rainy, the walking person noticed the change in the weather, put an umbrella, and could respond appropriately to the deterioration of the weather. Is expressed.

When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 68(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and a bad impression is generally given. Since it is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 68(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy is expressed in the image. In general, since it gives an impression that it cannot be said that the image shown in FIG. 68(a) can be compared to the image shown in FIG. 68(a), it is advantageous to the player regarding the game situation compared to the image shown in FIG. 68(a). Gives recognition that can not be said. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 68(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who can appropriately respond to the bad weather with an umbrella is represented in the image. It has been done and generally gives a good impression and gives a positive perception about the playing situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) gives the player in the image of FIG. 68(a) a recognition that is not disadvantageous regarding the game situation, and then, In the image of FIG. 68(b), the player is given an unfavorable recognition of the game situation, and then in the image of FIG. 68(c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. .. By displaying such a notice effect, the player's expectation for the game can be changed.

As shown in FIGS. 66, 67, and 68, the effect set by the AB display pattern table causes the player to recognize that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous as the notice effect advances. Is configured to give. In particular, when the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 and the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 68 are compared. 66(a) and FIG. 68(a) are the same image, and FIG. 66(b) and FIG. 68(b) are the same image. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to which of the notice effect shown in FIG. 66 and the notice effect shown in FIG. 68 is changed. More specifically, a person who is aware of a change in weather can give the player a sense of urgency with respect to a change such as whether or not to hold an umbrella at the end, and the player's attention degree to the notice production can be increased. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the BC display pattern table will be described.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a BC display pattern table. In the case of the BC display pattern table, the non-display, the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3), and the display pattern (B2-B3) are respectively set in three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). /C1-C3) and four display patterns (B1/C1-C2-C3) are assigned. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for BC is out (without reach), the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (of the above four display patterns ( The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that (B1/C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 70(a), FIG. 70(b), and FIG. 70(c). As shown in the figure, the notice presentation shows that the weather changes from cloudy to rain, while the dog appears in the box and the dog gets wet.

When an image composed of the image B2 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the cloudy weather. Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain. The image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. However, after that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 70(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the dog has a large face out of the box and gets wet with rain. Is given, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player a disadvantageous perception about the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) gives the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation when the image of FIG. 70(c) is displayed.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3/C1) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71(a), FIG. 71(b), and FIG. 71(c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses that the weather is changing from cloudy to rain and that the box is placed in such weather.

When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the cloud, and generally, Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain. The image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. When an image including the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image has not changed from the image in FIG. 71(b), and the image is also a game. The player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. In this way, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1) does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 72(a), FIG. 72(b), and FIG. 72(c). As shown in the figure, the advance notice effect expresses the appearance of the dog in the box on a sunny day.

When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 72A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the clear, and generally, Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Then, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 72(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the dog appears in the box in the sunny weather. Therefore, as compared with FIG. 72(a), the player is given more advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the notice effect based on the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 is high in the jackpot lottery, and therefore, in FIG. Even in the notice effect by the objects B and C shown, when the image advances from FIG. 72(a) to FIG. 72(b), the image of the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2. On the other hand, it gives an advantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image including the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 72(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the dog makes a large face in the box in the sunny weather. Since, in general, a good impression is given, the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In this way, the effect by the display pattern (B1/C1-C2-C3) is the same as the notice effect by the C display pattern table of FIG. 64, while the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3, and other Since an image that gives a bad impression to the player is not displayed, it is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game as the notice effect proceeds.

Among the effects set by the BC display pattern table, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3/C1-C3) shown in FIG. 70 and the display pattern (B2-B3/C1) shown in FIG. -Comparison with the notice effect by C3) will be described.

These two notice effects have the same image up to an intermediate image. Specifically, FIG. 70(a) and FIG. 71(a) are the same image, and FIG. 70(b) and FIG. 71(b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of these two notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed thereafter, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two notice effects. The image of FIG. 70(c) is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3, and the image of a dog that gets wet with rain is an image that generally gives a bad impression. Therefore, the situation of the game to the player. Give a disadvantageous perception about. On the other hand, the image of FIG. 71(c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3, and the image in which the box is placed in the rain does not give a bad impression to the player. On the other hand, it does not give a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. In other words, when the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed and then the image C1 changes to the image C3, the image is as shown in FIG. Against the game situation, on the other hand, when the image C1 does not change thereafter in the state where the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, Since the image is shown in FIG. 71(c), it does not give a disadvantageous recognition to the player about the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 70 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 71 and displaying an image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, it is possible to determine whether or not the image C1 changes to the image C3. It is possible to attract the player's attention and give the player a sense of urgency.

In the notice effect by the display pattern table for C of FIG. 64, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player is given a better recognition of the game situation. Specifically, an image that shows the appearance of a dog in the box gives a generally better impression than an image that shows the appearance of the box, The player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, when the notice effect based on the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 is higher in the jackpot lottery, so the image Regarding the situation of the game to the player, the case where the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 is more than the case where the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3. Give a positive recognition.

However, when the image B3 is combined with the images C1 and C3 and the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 71(c)), the image C3 is smaller. This gives the player more favorable recognition of the game situation than the case where the image is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image B1 (FIG. 70(c)).

That is, when the image B3 (the image of rain) is not combined with each of the images C1 and C3, the image C3 (in the box) is displayed more than when the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image of the dog) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image B3 (the image of the rain) is added to each of the image C1 and the image C3, although the player is more likely to recognize the game situation. ), the case where the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a is better than the case where the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. It gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

Therefore, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the game situation depending on how the images are combined. In the case of the present embodiment, when a predetermined image is combined with the effect image that is stepped up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation is higher, the player recognizes a completely different recognition of the game situation. Can be given to. Whether or not the player recognizes the image C1 (the image of the box) or the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a, whether or not the image B3 (the image of the rain) is displayed Recognize that the game situation is different depending on. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the image displayed on the display surface 41a.

Further, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (image of the box) is displayed more than the image C3 (image of the rain) without being combined with the image C3 (image of the rain). When the image of the dog in the box) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (image of rain), the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed although the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher. The case of displaying in combination with the image B3 (image of rain) wins the jackpot lottery than the case of displaying the image C3 (image of the dog in the box) in combination with the image B3 (image of rain). There is a high probability that Therefore, when the image of the object C such as the image C1 (the image of the box) or the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) or a part of the image of the object C is displayed, whether the image B3 (the image of the rain) is displayed or not is displayed. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player.

In general, the effect image in which the higher the step-up (for example, the more the effect image progresses in the order of the image P1→the image P2→the image P3), the higher the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is the image P2 than the image P1 and the image P2 than the image P2. P3 is configured so as to be an image that gives a good impression to the player. That is, in the images P1, P2, and P3, the order in which the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is high and the order in which the impression given to the player is good or bad are aligned. With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved as the effect image is stepped up (progressed). Displaying [image P1+image Q], [image P2+image Q], and [image P3+image Q] by combining other images (for example, image Q) with such a normal effect image. Even so, the [image P2+image Q] rather than the [image P1+image Q] and the [image P3+image Q] than the [image P2+image Q] will give a better impression to the player. Is composed of. That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the images Q are simply combined, the [image P2+image Q] gives the player more than the [image P3+image Q]. It is difficult to make an image that gives a good impression. In the present embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image displayed as the effect image to be stepped up and the content of the combined image. In the present embodiment, the images Q are combined although the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2 by devising the contents of the images P1, P2, P3 and Q. In this case, the [image P2+image Q] can give a better impression to the player than the [image P3+image Q].

By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player the following recognition. That is, in the effect image that is not combined with the image Q, it is recognized that the game situation is more advantageous as the image P1→image P2→image P3 progresses, and in the effect image combined with the image Q, [image P1+image It becomes possible to give recognition that the situation of the game is disadvantageous as it progresses from [Q]→[image P2+image Q]→[image P3+image Q].

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an ABC display pattern table. In the case of the ABC display pattern table, the non-display and the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) are provided for each of the three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). ), a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3), and a display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) are assigned. There is. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for ABC has the most display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) among the above-mentioned four display patterns in the case of deviation (no reach). Often displayed, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) out of the above four display patterns is the most frequently displayed and the jackpot is a big hit. In the case of, the display pattern of 0 to 99 is selected so that the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed. The value of the random number counter C22 is assigned.

Next, the AC display pattern table will be described.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 74(a), FIG. 74(b), and FIG. 74(c). As shown in the figure, the notice production expresses how a walking person and a dog with a face out of the box get wet while the weather changes from sunny, cloudy, and rain. There is.

When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 74(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a box are represented in the image in the clear, and generally, Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image including the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 74(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from fine to cloudy, and the person changes the weather. In addition to the fact that the dog looks a little out of the box, the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. However, after that, when an image including the image A2, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 74(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the person who notices the change in weather and the inside of the box are included in the image. It expresses that a dog with a big face on it gets wet in the rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player a disadvantageous perception about the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) gives an intonation to the player's expectation for the game and, at the end of the notice effect, gives the player , Give a disadvantageous perception about the game situation.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 75(a), FIG. 75(b), and FIG. 75(c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses a person who notices the change in the weather and the appearance of a dog in the box while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy.

When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 75(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking on a sunny day and a box. Is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so that the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 75(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices the change in the weather in the weather changing from fine to cloudy. A person and the appearance of a dog slightly appearing in the box are expressed, and the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. When an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 75(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog with a large face out of the box are expressed in the cloudy weather. , The image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. In this way, the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2/C1-C2-C3) does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 76(a), FIG. 76(b), and FIG. 76(c). As shown in the figure, the notice production expresses that a walking person notices the change in weather as the weather changes from sunny, cloudy, and rain, and puts an umbrella on the dog out of the box. Has been done.

When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 76(a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking on a sunny day and a box. Is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so that the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 76(b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices the change of the weather in the weather changing from fine to cloudy. A person and the appearance of a dog slightly appearing in the box are expressed, and the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. When the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 76(c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, in the rain, a dog with a large face out of the box and an umbrella for the dog are displayed. The person to be mentioned is expressed, and since the image gives a moving impression in general, it gives the player an advantageous recognition regarding the situation of the game. In this way, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) gives the player an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

Here, among the effects set by the ABC display pattern table, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 74 and the effect shown in FIG. A comparison with the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) will be described.

These two notice effects have the same image up to an intermediate image. Specifically, FIG. 74(a) and FIG. 76(a) are the same image, and FIG. 74(b) and FIG. 76(b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of these two notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed thereafter, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two notice effects. The image of FIG. 74(c) is an image in which the image A2, the image B3, and the image B3 are combined, and the image in which the person and the dog get wet in the rain is an image that generally gives a bad impression, and thus the image is given to the player. On the other hand, it gives a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. On the other hand, the image of FIG. 76(c) is an image in which the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 are combined, and an image in which a person puts an umbrella in the rain so that the dog does not get wet with the rain. Is an image that gives a good impression, so that the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In other words, in the state where the image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed, when the image A2 does not change thereafter, the image is as shown in FIG. 74(c). , Gives a disadvantageous recognition to the player about the game situation, while the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are displayed in the state where the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are displayed. In the case of the change to, since the image is as shown in FIG. 76(c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 74 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 76 and displaying an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined, whether or not the image A2 changes to the image A3. This makes it possible to attract the attention of the player and give the player a sense of urgency.

In addition, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 76 has the following characteristics.

In the notice effect by the display pattern table for B of FIG. 63 described above, it is expressed that the weather is getting worse as the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 and the effect image progress, so that the effect image progresses. As it does, it gives a disadvantageous recognition to the player about the situation of the game. Further, when the notice effect based on the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 and the image B3 is set to be low in the jackpot lottery. Therefore, as the image B1, the image B2, the image B3, and the effect image progress, the player is further disadvantageously recognized about the game situation. That is, the object B gives a disadvantageous recognition to the player by advancing the images in the order of the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3.

However, the object B is combined with the object A whose image progresses in the order of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3, and the object C whose image progresses in the order of the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- By displaying as A3/B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change the effect image to the content that gives the player an impression, and it is advantageous for the player about the game situation. The image can be changed to give recognition. As described above, the images configured as the object A, the object B, and the object C in the present embodiment are displayed as one object and by being combined with other objects by devising the contents of the image. Depending on the case, it is possible to greatly change the impression given by the image, and it is possible to greatly change the recognition of the game situation given to the player.

In the present embodiment, the notice effect by the object A, the object B, the object C, or the notice effect composed of the combination thereof is used as the effect indicating whether or not the jackpot lottery is won. That is, although these notice effects are used as the effects showing the expectation degree of the jackpot, they may be used as the effect showing the expectation degree of the probability variation jackpot or the expectation degree of being in the probability variation state to the player. Even in this case, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous, depending on how the images of the respective objects are combined.

Next, the effect type setting processing in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 37: S2303) of the effect setting process.

In step S3301, the counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. After that, the process advances to step S3302, the display object table is referred to, the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21 is compared, and the combination of objects to be displayed as the notice effect is determined. After executing step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, the counter value is acquired from the display pattern random number counter C22. After that, the process advances to step S3304, and it is confirmed whether the game times for which the notice effect is to be set are jackpots, misses (with reach), and misses (without reach). After executing step S3304, the process advances to step S3305.

In step S3305, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of the objects to be displayed as the notice effect is referred to, the acquired display pattern random number counter C22 is compared, and the display pattern is determined. After that, the process advances to step S3306 to set the determined display pattern as a notice effect. After executing step S3306, the process advances to step S3307.

In step S3307, it is determined whether the game number is a big hit. When it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is a big hit (S3307: YES), the process proceeds to step S3308.

In step S3308, it is determined whether the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S3306 is a full display pattern. Here, with the full display pattern, there are three combinations of objects displayed as the notice effect: object A, object B, and object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3/B1-B2-). B3/C1-C2-C3). That is, it means the display pattern shown in FIG. When it is determined in step S3308 that the set display pattern of the notice effect is the full display pattern (S3308: YES), the process proceeds to step S3309.

In step S3309, as the reach effect setting process, the reach effect executed after the notice effect of the full display pattern is set to the sequel effect expressing the sequel of the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sequel effect executed as a reach effect. The sequel effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 78(a), FIG. 78(b), and FIG. 78(c). As illustrated, the sequel production is a production in which a person walks in the rain with a dog under his umbrella. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to show the player that the probability of being a big hit is high, and to improve the player's expectation.

The description returns to FIG. 77. In step S3309, after setting the sequel effect as the reach effect, the process proceeds to step S3310.

When it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is not a big hit (S3307: NO), the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the game time is a reach, that is, whether the game is out (reach is present). When it is determined in step S3311 that the game time is reach (S3311: YES), or when it is determined that the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S3308 is not the full display pattern (S3308: NO), Proceeds to step S3312.

In step S3312, a normal reach effect is set as the reach effect setting process. Then, it progresses to step S3310.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3311 that the game time is not reach (S3311: NO), step S3312 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S3310.

In step S3310, the notice effect set in step S3306 and the reach effect set in step S3309 are set as effect commands. After that, the effect type setting process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the recognition of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation given to the player depending on how the objects are combined, so that various effects using each object are executed. It is possible to use each object image effectively. For example, even when the object A is displayed, there is an advantage about the situation of the game given to the player, depending on how it is combined with other objects or whether it is displayed in the same period as other objects. Since the recognition regarding the disadvantage is different, it is possible to execute various effects using each object image, and each object image can be effectively used. Also, for each of the various display patterns consisting of a combination of each object image, since the probability of winning the jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed is different, the degree of attention of the player to the effect constituted by each display pattern, It is possible to improve interest level and expectation.

Furthermore, in the case of displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (eg, jackpot, out (reach), out (no reach)) Thus, by adjusting the arrangement position, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game. Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern is set in which the display start timing of each object is changed according to the game situation, so by adjusting the display start timing of each object It is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Seventh embodiment:
FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the above-described first to sixth embodiments is that an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information is provided in the sound emission control device 90. is there. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and the time information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires the date information and the time information output from the RTC 96, and executes the RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date information and the time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. Start the process for execution. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is composed of an RTC effect moving image for 300 seconds and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed every 00 minutes.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The RTC effect in progress flag shown in the figure is a flag that is turned on when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied and the RTC effect is started, and is turned off when the RTC effect is finished.

Display control device 100, when the time is 00 hours and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image (time t1), the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the background. The mode of displaying the moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music. At the same time, the output is started from the temporal head position "01" of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound preset by the player.

When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image as the display mode of the symbol display device 41. The mode is changed to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed. Then, when the display control device 100 shifts to a mode in which the background moving image is displayed, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode in which the background moving image is displayed (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music, and is preset by the player. With the output level (volume) of the generated voice maintained, the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music.

The sound emission control device 90 is capable of outputting a plurality of types of background music, and when performing background music cueing processing (processing for starting output or display from the temporal start position “01”). The display control device 100 is configured to randomly select the type of background music to be subjected to the cueing process by lottery, and can display a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to a plurality of types of background music. Alternatively, a background moving image corresponding to the background music may be selected to execute the cueing process. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In FIG. 83 described later, also in the case where the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute the cueing process of the background music and the background moving image, similarly, a configuration for selecting the background music and the background moving image from a plurality of types is set. Can be adopted.

FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo moving image.

When the time becomes 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo movie (time t1), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as the demo movie. The display mode is changed from the display mode to the display mode of the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 temporally changes the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the output level preset by the player.

When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image as the display mode of the symbol display device 41. The mode is changed to the mode for displaying the demo moving image. Then, when the display control device 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the demo moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image (time t2), the audio emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the audio output level ( Volume) to 0.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the transition condition is that the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is switched to a mode in which a demo video is displayed, and the audio output mode is switched to a mode in which the volume is zero (silent state). It is a condition.

When the time becomes 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image (time t1), the display control device 100 sets the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background moving image. The display mode is changed from the display mode to the display mode of the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music. At the same time, the output is started from the temporal head position "01" of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound preset by the player.

In the display control device 100, while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image, the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45 is stopped (time t2), and 15 seconds have elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was stopped, and the transition condition is set. When is satisfied (time t3), after the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to a mode in which the demo moving image is displayed. It is shifted (time t4). Then, when the display control device 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the demo moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image (time t4), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the sound output level ( Volume) to 0.

FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As the return condition, as described above, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and the output mode of the sound is such that the background music is output at the preset volume. It is a condition for returning to the mode.

When the time becomes 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo movie (time t1), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as the demo movie. The display mode is changed from the display mode to the display mode of the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 temporally changes the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the output level preset by the player.

The display control device 100 determines the RTC effect moving image in advance when the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image and changes in the symbol on the main display unit 45 start and the return condition is satisfied (time t2). After the end of the display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment), the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3). Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music, and is preset by the player. While the output level (volume) of the generated voice is maintained, the output is started from the temporal start position “01” of the background music.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed in the sound-light side MPU of the first embodiment is that after the command corresponding process (step S1802) is executed, the standby state transition process (step S1803) is executed. Before this, the RTC effect process (step S1802a) is executed, and the other processes are the same as in the first embodiment. In the RTC effect process, a process for executing the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect process executed in the sound-light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON. The RTC effect flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S3401: NO), the flow advances to step S3402 to read the time information output from the RTC 96. Then, it progresses to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether the read time information coincides with the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information coincides with 00 minutes every hour. If it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information does not match the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect (S3403: NO), this RTC effect process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3404, RTC effect time setting processing is executed. Specifically, "150,000" (that is, 5.0 min) is set to the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. After executing step S3404, the process advances to step S3405.

In step S3405, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the RTC effect moving image start command, the display-side MPU 102 starts the process for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3405, the process advances to step S3406.

In step S3406, output start processing of RTC effect music is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal head position of the RTC effect music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped and the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S3407, and the RTC effect producing flag is set to ON. Then, it progresses to step S3408.

In step S3408, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start wait flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag is ON. The situation where any of the volume reduction flag, the temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag is ON means that the transition condition described above is satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. I mean. If it is determined in step S3408 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S3408: YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

In step S3409, the output level (volume) of the reduced voice is returned to a value preset by the player. After that, the process advances to step S3410, and the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is turned ON. The post-RTC effect demo moving image start flag is a flag for starting the demo moving image after the RTC effect has ended, and when the transition condition is satisfied before the RTC effect is started or when the RTC effect is being executed. It is a flag that is turned on when is satisfied. After executing step S3410, the flow proceeds to step S3411, and among the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag, the flag that has been turned on is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S3412. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3408 that all of the volume reduction flag, the temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag are OFF (S3408: NO), the processes of steps S3409 to S3411 are executed. No, the process advances to step S3412.

In step S3412, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S3412: YES), the flow advances to step S3413 to turn off the RTC post-production demonstration video start flag, and also advances to step S3414 to establish the return condition. Turn off the flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S3412: NO), the RTC effect process is directly terminated without executing the processes of steps S3413 and S3414.

When it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect flag is ON (S3401: YES), that is, when the RTC effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3415.

In step S3415, it is determined whether it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S3403 is 0. When it is determined in step S3415 that it is the timing to end the RTC effect (S3415: YES), the process proceeds to step S3416, and the process when the RTC effect is ended is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3415 that it is not the timing to end the RTC effect (S3415: NO), the process proceeds from step S3408 to step S3414 described above. The reason is that the transition condition and the return condition may be satisfied even during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processes of steps S3408 to S3414.

In step S3416, the flag during RTC production is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S3417, and RTC effect music output stop processing is executed. Then, it progresses to step S3418.

In step S3418, it is determined whether the RTC post-rendering demonstration moving image start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is not ON (S3418: NO), the process proceeds to step S3419, and a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts the process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S3420, and background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the background music. Then, this RTC effect processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC demonstration demo moving image start flag is ON (S3418: YES), the process proceeds to step S3421 and a demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S3422, and the demo movie display flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S3423.

In step S3423, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because the music output together with the demo video is not set in the present embodiment. After executing step S3423, the process advances to step S3424 to turn on the cue determination flag. By this processing, the cue determination flag can be turned on while the demo moving image is displayed. After executing step S3424, the process proceeds to step S3425, and the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is turned off. Then, this RTC effect processing is ended.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the standby state shift processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (FIG. 41) executed in the sound-light side MPU 92 of the first embodiment is that before executing the process (step S2701) for determining whether or not the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. , The process of determining whether the RTC effect flag is ON (step S2700) is executed, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In step S2700, it is determined whether or not the RTC production in progress flag is ON, and when it is determined that the RTC production in progress flag is ON (S2700: YES), this standby state transition processing is ended as it is. That is, it is configured not to shift to the standby state while the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2700 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S2700: NO), the process proceeds to step S2701, and it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. The following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the command handling process executed by the display-side MPU 102 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the command corresponding process (FIG. 45) executed in the display-side MPU 102 of the first embodiment is that after the process of starting the display of the background moving image (step S3112) is executed, and the other processes (step S3113). ) Is executed, and the processes of steps S3112a and S3112b described later are executed, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In step S3112a, it is determined whether the RTC effect moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. When it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3112b, and processing for starting the display of the RTC effect moving image is executed. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S3112b, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112b. The following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the mode in which the background moving image is displayed is changed to the mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed, and thereafter, the predetermined display of the RTC effect moving image is performed. When the period ends, the mode is changed from displaying the RTC effect moving image to displaying the background moving image, and when changing to the mode displaying the background moving image, from the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image. Start display. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes when the mode is changed to the background moving image display mode. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes when the mode of displaying the background moving image is changed, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the RTC effect is generated. A configuration for starting the display of the background moving image from the temporal position of the background moving image displayed immediately before the transition to the mode for displaying the moving image, or a mode for displaying the background moving image from the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image In this case, the temporal position of the background moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode of displaying the background moving image. Even after the transition to the mode, the background video is continuously reproduced as an internal process, and when the mode is switched from the mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed to the mode in which the background video is displayed, the background is continuously reproduced as the internal process. A configuration in which a moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the like can be mentioned.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the mode of displaying the demo moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and thereafter, the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends. In this case, when the mode is changed from displaying the RTC effect moving image to displaying the demo moving image, and when moving to the mode displaying the demo moving image, the display of the demo moving image is started from a predetermined time position. .. Therefore, control can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demo moving image is started changes when the mode is changed to display the demo moving image. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demo moving image is started changes when the display mode of the demo moving image is displayed, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the RTC effect is displayed. A configuration for starting the display of the demo video from the temporal position of the demo video displayed immediately before the transition to the mode for displaying the video, or a transition from the mode for displaying the RTC effect video to the mode for displaying the demo video In this case, the temporal position of the demo moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode of displaying the demo moving image. Even after shifting to the mode, the reproduction of the demo movie is continued as an internal process, and when the mode of displaying the RTC effect movie is switched to the mode of displaying the demo movie, the demo is continuously reproduced as the internal process. A configuration in which a moving image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the like can be mentioned.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, even when the transition condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image should be interrupted in the middle of a predetermined display period. Instead, the display shifts to the mode in which the demo moving image is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, so that it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, even if the return condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image should be interrupted in the middle of a predetermined display period. Instead, the mode in which the background moving image is displayed is returned after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, so that a sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends at substantially the same time in each pachinko machine 10. While moving to the mode of displaying the background moving image, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying from a predetermined temporal position of the background moving image when displaying the background moving image, and thus is displayed on each pachinko machine 10. Background videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed sees a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to have an interest in the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, the temporal start position of the background moving image is changed. Since the display is started from, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the background moving image when shifting to the mode of displaying the background moving image. .. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a temporal midway position of the background video when the background video is displayed, the player views the background video from the temporal midway position. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user feels something is wrong or that there is a part of the background video that is not being watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the background video can be viewed by the player from the temporal start position, so that a sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the background video can be displayed. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that everything can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, from the predetermined temporal position. Since the output of the background music is started, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music is started is changed. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music is started varies, for example, in FIG. 80, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the mode in which the RTC effect music is output is shifted to. The output is started when the background music is output from the temporal position of the background music that was output immediately before, or when the RTC effect music is output to the background music. The configuration in which the temporal position of the background music is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music, and even after the transition from the aspect of outputting the background music to the aspect of outputting the RTC effect music There is a configuration in which the background music is continuously reproduced as an internal process, and when the mode of outputting the RTC effect music is changed to the mode of outputting the background music, the background music continuously reproduced is output as an internal process. Can be mentioned.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the temporal start position of the background music Since the output is started from, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the output is started from a temporal middle position of the background music. For example, if the configuration is adopted in which the output is started from a position midway in time of the background music, the player will feel the discomfort because he will appreciate the background music from the position midway in time. You may feel unsatisfactory because there are some parts of the background music that you are not listening to. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the background music from the temporal start position, so that it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and to play the background music. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that everything can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends at substantially the same time in each pachinko machine 10. While moving to the mode of displaying the demo video, each pachinko machine 10 starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the demo video when displaying the demo video, so that each pachinko machine 10 displays the demo video. You can sync demo videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. Therefore, the player who visits the game hall in which the plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are installed sees a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to have an interest in the pachinko machine 10.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode in which the demo moving image is displayed, the temporal start position of the demo moving image is increased. Since the display is started from, the discomfort given to the player is compared to the configuration in which the display is started from the temporal midway position of the demo video when the demo video is displayed and the demo video is displayed. Can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the demo video is displayed and the demo video is displayed at a position midway in time when the demo video is displayed, the player can temporally display the demo video. Since you will be watching from the middle position, you may feel discomfort or feel unsatisfactory because there are some parts of the demo video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the demo video can be viewed by the player from the temporal start position, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the demo video can be displayed. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that everything can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. First, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the eighth embodiment, and then the details of the processing will be described. The hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

H1. Overview of processing by the gaming machine:
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 88(a) shows the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in the figure, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10. In the first hold display area Ds1, hold displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 indicating the number of hold based on winning in the first starting opening 33 are displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, hold displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24 indicating the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 are displayed. Each hold display corresponds to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is acquired and stored based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. The maximum value of the number of reserved displays is four in the first reserved display area Ds1, Dm11 to Dm14, and four in the second reserved display area Ds2, Dm21 to Dm24.

For each hold display displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display in the order of the hold displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 is the target of the big hit lottery. Similarly, for each of the pending displays displayed in the second pending display area Ds2, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display is a jackpot selection target in the order of the pending displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24.

The display mode of each hold display suggests that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each hold display may win the big hit lottery, and corresponds to the possibility of the possibility, and a plurality of stages from upper rank to lower rank. The display mode of is set. As the display mode of the hold display becomes higher (ranks up) among a plurality of stages, it is suggested that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is likely to win the jackpot lottery.

FIG. 88(b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the hold display set in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set in correspondence with the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery. The display mode of the hold display is set in order from the higher level in five levels of actual display level Lvr5, actual display level Lvr4, actual display level Lvr3, actual display level Lvr2, and actual display level Lvr1. The display mode corresponding to the higher actual display level Lvr is set as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher, and the display mode corresponding to the lower actual display level Lvr is set as the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is lower. ..

In the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is represented by color. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr5 is displayed in yellow, the actual display level Lvr4 is displayed in red, the actual display level Lvr3 is displayed in green, the actual display level Lvr2 is displayed in blue, and the actual display level Lvr1 is displayed in white. The display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is not limited to the mode expressed by color, but may be a mode recognizable by the player, such as a mode expressed by a pattern or a mode expressed by a character. Various display modes can be adopted as long as the difference between the actual display levels Lvr is expressed.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display. For example, an effect of changing the white hold display to blue and an effect of changing the blue hold display to red are executed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display is executed, the display order changes as the order of the changed hold display being the target of the jackpot lottery is later. The effect is executed so that the number of steps in which the actual display level Lvr is increased between before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display is increased. To be more precise, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 that is later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. Is changed in a plurality of stages (actual display level Lvr1 to actual display level Lvr5) of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display (before the change of the display mode). The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the actual display level Lvr after the change and the actual display level Lvr after the change becomes larger.

Specifically, when the display form of the hold display Dm11 is changed to a higher display form, the display form of the hold display Dm12 is displayed as a higher display than the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in actual display level Lvr). The difference between the pre-change stage and the post-change stage (the difference between the actual display levels Lvr) in the case of changing to the mode is larger, and the pre-change and the change in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 to the higher display mode. The difference between the stages before and after the change (difference between the actual display levels Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a higher display mode is larger than the difference between the stages (difference between the actual display levels Lvr). , The display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to the higher display mode based on the difference between the stage before and after the change (the difference between the actual display levels Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the higher display mode. In this case, the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the stage before the change and the stage after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) becomes larger.

In the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the display mode of the next higher stage is changed. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to a higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference between the actual display levels Lvr) is one. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, it is changed to the display mode of the next higher stage. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to a higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference between the actual display levels Lvr) is two. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the display mode is changed to a display mode at a stage higher by three. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference between the actual display levels Lvr) is three. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, it is changed to the display mode of the four higher stages. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to a higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr) is four.

In the case of the hold display Dm11, for example, when the hold display Dm11 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to blue (actual display level Lvr2) which is the display mode of the next higher stage, and the hold display Dm11 is also set. Is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is the display mode of the next higher stage. In the case of the hold display Dm12, for example, when the hold display Dm12 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to the green (actual display level Lvr3) which is the display mode of the next higher stage, and the hold display Dm12 is also used. Is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode of the two higher stages. In the case of the hold display Dm13, for example, when the hold display Dm13 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is the display mode of the three higher stages, and the hold display Dm13. Is blue (actual display level Lvr2), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode of the three higher stages. In the case of the hold display Dm14, for example, when the hold display Dm14 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5) which is the display mode of the four higher stages.

Even when changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, it is the same as changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. In the hold display being displayed, the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger as the order of the jackpot lottery changes the display mode of the subsequent hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of steps of is increased.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before changing the display mode of the hold display. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is to be changed, among the displayed pending displays. Hereinafter, the effect including the effect for changing the display mode of the hold display and the suggestion effect is also referred to as the hold effect.

89 and 90 are explanatory diagrams for explaining suggestive effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 89A shows a suggestive effect (pattern 1) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11. In the suggestive effect (pattern 1), the gun W1 having a short range is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W1 and hits the hold display Dm11. After that, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. In other words, when the gun W1 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm11.

FIG. 89(b) shows a suggestive effect (pattern 2) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. In the suggestive effect (Pattern 2), a gun W2 having a longer range than the gun W1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W2 and hits the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm11 or hold display Dm12) hit by the bullet changes. In other words, when the gun W2 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12.

FIG. 90A shows a suggestive effect (pattern 3) that is executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. In the suggestive effect (pattern 3), a tank W3 equipped with a cannon having a range longer than that of the gun W2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a cannonball is fired from the cannon of the tank W3 and hits the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12 or hold display Dm13) hit by the shell changes. In other words, when the tank W3 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13.

FIG. 90B shows a suggestion effect (pattern 4) that is executed prior to changing the display mode of any of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. In the suggestive effect (pattern 4), a missile W4 having a range longer than that of a cannon included in the tank W3 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, the missile W4 is fired and hits any one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12, hold display Dm13, or hold display Dm14) hit by the missile W4 changes. In other words, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display for which the display mode is changed is any one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before changing the display mode of the hold display, and displays the displayed hold display. Of these, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is changed.

For example, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90(b)), the pending display that may change the display mode is the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, or the pending display Dm14. The number of steps of increasing the actual display level Lvr before and after the change of the display mode is greater when the held display against which the launched missile W4 hits is the held display Dm13 than the held display Dm12 and the held display Dm14 than the held display Dm13. growing. Therefore, when the suggestive effect is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player is aware of which range of the display mode of the pending display changes (for example, if the suggestive effect pattern 4 is displayed, Dm12 to Dm14 While recognizing that the display mode of any of the hold displays in the range changes), the player is made to guess which hold display mode of the hold displays of the range will change, and gives the player a sense of expectation or tension. can do.

Hereinafter, an example of processing for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

H2. Processing details:
The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content of the update process (first embodiment: FIG. 36) and the effect setting process (first embodiment: FIG. 37) at the time of winning. Therefore, in this description, the update process and the effect setting process at the time of winning in the present embodiment will be described, and the description of the other processes will be omitted.

<Update process at the time of winning>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the time of winning in the eighth embodiment. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command corresponding process.

The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 36) in the update processing at the time of winning is that the present embodiment is added with a holding effect parameter setting processing as step S3505. Steps S3501 to S3504 in the winning update processing of the present embodiment and steps S2201 to S2204 (FIG. 36) in the winning update processing of the first embodiment are the same processing. Therefore, description of the processes of steps S3501 to S3504 will be omitted.

The holding effect parameter setting process in step S3505 is a subroutine executed to set various parameters necessary for executing the suggestion effect and changing the display mode of the hold display. Details of the holding effect parameter setting process will be described later.

Here, the holding effect storage area used in the holding effect parameter setting process will be described. The parameters set by the holding effect parameter setting process are stored in the holding effect storage area provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. The hold effect storage area is a storage area provided in the sound-light side RAM 94 included in the sound emission control device 90.

FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a storage area for holding effect. The hold effect storage area includes a first hold effect storage area and a second hold effect storage area. FIG. 92A shows the first holding effect storage area, and FIG. 92B shows the second holding effect storage area.

The first hold effect storage area is a storage area that stores various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 that are the hold displays in the first hold display area Ds1. The second hold effect storage area is a storage area that stores various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24, which are hold displays in the second hold display area Ds2. Since the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area have the same configuration, the first holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92(a) will be described and shown in FIG. 92(b). The description of the second holding effect storage area will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), the first holding effect storage area stores various parameters and flags for each holding game time (n) for the first starting opening. The holding game times (n=1 to 4) for the first starting opening shown correspond to the holding display Dm11 to the holding display Dm14. That is, the reserve game times are executed in the order of the reserve game times of the first starting opening (n=1) to the reserve game times of the first starting opening (n=4).

As shown in the figure, the first holding effect storage area is an additional level Lva, a display level upper limit value Lvm, an actual display level Lvr, and a hold changeable flag for each holding game time (n) for the first starting opening. Memorize

The additional level Lva is a parameter whose value is fixed for each storage area corresponding to each holding game time (n=1 to 4). That is, the additional level Lva of the first starting opening reserved game times (n=1) is fixed at 1, and the additional level Lva of the first starting opening reserved game times (n=2) is fixed at 2. The additional level Lva of the holding game times (n=3) of the first starting opening is fixed at 3, and the additional level Lva of the holding game times of the first starting opening (n=4) is fixed at 4. There is. When changing the display mode of the hold display, the additional level indicates the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. It is possible to make the stepwise width (difference of the actual display level Lvr) in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display larger as changing. It is a parameter used for this purpose, and is a value corresponding to the number of steps of the actual display level Lvr that rises when the display mode of the hold display changes. Therefore, the value of the additional level Lva is larger as the pending display corresponding to the subsequent value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the jackpot lottery target. In other words, it is the level value potentially given to each of the pending game times.

On the other hand, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are associated with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each holding game time, and each time the game time is executed, the area to be stored is next to each other. Shift to the storage area for reserved game times. For example, as shown in FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b), the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the holding game times (n=4) of the first starting opening Each parameter of, when the game time is executed once, shifts to the storage area of the holding game time (n=3) of the first starting opening in the first holding effect storage area, and the game time is further executed once. When it is done, it shifts to the storage area of the holding game times (n=2) of the first starting opening in the storage area for the first holding effect.

The display level upper limit Lvm is a parameter that defines the upper limit of how much the actual display level Lvr can be changed to a higher level when the display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, in the hold display in which the display level upper limit value Lvm is 5, the actual display level Lvr can be changed to 5. In the hold display in which the display level upper limit value Lvm is 3, the actual display level Lvr can be changed up to 3, but the actual display level Lvr can be changed up to 3 or higher actual display level Lvr such as 4 or 5. Can not.

The actual display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the level of the display mode of the current hold display, as described in FIG. 88.

The values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are values that are stored in correspondence with the holding game times when a game ball enters the starting opening and there are holding game times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92(b), for example, at a certain time, there is a reserved game time for the second starting port (n=3) and a reserved game time for the second starting port (n=4). If not, the values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to the pending game times are not stored.

The hold changeable flag is used when executing the process of changing the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, the hold changeable flag is turned ON in the hold game times that satisfy the condition that the display mode of the hold display can be changed, and is turned OFF after the hold display for changing the display mode is determined. It Hereinafter, the flowchart of the holding effect parameter setting process executed using the holding effect storage area will be described.

<Holding effect parameter setting process>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the holding effect parameter setting process. The holding effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

In step S3601, display level upper limit value setting processing is executed. The process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit value Lvm. Details of the display level upper limit value setting process will be described later. After the display level upper limit value setting process is executed in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602.

In step S3602, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times corresponding to the entry of the current game ball. The parameter setting process for holding effect is a process executed every time a game ball enters the starting opening, and in step S3602, every time the game ball enters the starting opening, the storage effect storage area first In the 1 hold effect storage area or the 2nd hold effect storage area, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the hold game time storage area corresponding to the entry. In this processing, since 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times corresponding to the ball entry, the display mode is set to white corresponding to 1 of the actual display level Lvr. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the starting opening, the actual display level Lvr of the storage area for the reserved game times corresponding to the game ball is set to 1. However, for example, When the acquired reach random number counter C3 is scheduled to execute the reach effect by the reach determination table, the actual display level Lvr is set to 2 or the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the entry. Is a value corresponding to the jackpot lottery, the actual display level Lvr is set based on the values of the various counters acquired by entering the starting opening, such as setting the actual display level Lvr to a value of 2 or more. May be determined. After executing step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603.

In step S3603, the additional level Lva is set. As described above, the additional level Lva has a fixed value corresponding to each holding game time. Therefore, when the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time is the pending game time (n=1), 1 is set as the additional level Lva, and the pending game time (n=2). In this case, 2 is set as the additional level Lva, and 3 is set as the additional level Lva in the case of holding game times (n=3), and 3 is set in the holding game times (n=4), 4 is set as the additional level Lva.

After executing step S3603, the parameter setting process for the holding effect is ended.

<Display level upper limit setting process>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the display level upper limit value setting processing. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: S3601) of the holding effect parameter setting process.

In step S3701, the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. After executing step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702.

In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the pending game times corresponding to the entry of the current game ball has been won in the jackpot lottery. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the destination determination process included in the hold command acquired from the main MPU 62 by the sound-light side MPU 92 by the destination determination process executed at the time of entering the starting opening this time. To judge.

When it is determined in step S3702 that the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball has been won in the jackpot lottery (S3702: YES), the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the jackpot upper limit value table is referred to. Specifically, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the jackpot upper limit table.

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit value table. FIG. 95(a) shows a jackpot upper limit value table.

The jackpot upper limit value table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are associated and recorded. The sound-light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm by referring to the jackpot upper limit table.

As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit value table, 80 values 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=5 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm, and as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm. 10 values of 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=4, and 5 values of 5 to 9 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=3. Five values 0 to 4 as the value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=2, and 0 values of the upper limit value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm=1. Is set. That is, in the pending game times that is won in the jackpot lottery, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 5 is the highest.

FIG. 95(b) shows a reach upper limit value table. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3705 described later. Similarly to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is also recorded with table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the display level upper limit Lvm are associated with each other and recorded. Is. In the pending game times in which the reach occurs, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 4 is the highest, and then the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 5 or 3 is high.

FIG. 95C shows the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table. The reach non-occurrence upper limit value table is an upper limit value table used in step S3706 described later. In the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table, like the jackpot upper limit value table, each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are recorded in association with each other. It is table data. In the non-reach holding game times, the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm is 1 is the highest, and the probability that the display level upper limit value Lvm is 2 is high.

The description returns to FIG. 94. In step S3703, after referring to the jackpot upper limit value table, the process proceeds to step S3707.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3702 that the pending game times corresponding to the entry of the current game ball has not been won in the jackpot lottery (S3702: NO), the flow proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball corresponds to the game time that causes the reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current pending game time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the destination determination process included in the hold command acquired from the main MPU 62 by the sound-light side MPU 92 by the destination determination process executed with the entry into the starting opening this time. judge.

When it is determined in step S3704 that the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball corresponds to the game time causing the reach (S3704: YES), the process proceeds to step S3705.

In step S3705, the reach upper limit value table is referenced. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach upper limit table. Then, it progresses to step S3707.

On the other hand, in step S3704, when it is determined that the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball does not correspond to the game time that causes the reach (S3704: NO), the process proceeds to step S3706.

In step S3706, the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach non-occurrence upper limit table. Then, it progresses to step S3707.

In step S3707, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm extracted in any of step S3703, step S3705, or step S3706 is set as the current pending game in the first holding effect storage area or the second holding effect storage area. Set to the storage area of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the number of times. After that, this display level upper limit value setting process ends.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process in the eighth embodiment. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1906) of the command corresponding process.

In the effect setting process, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 37) is that in the present embodiment, a hold effect setting process is added as step S3801. Steps S3802 to S3815 in the effect setting process of the present embodiment and steps S2301 to S2314 in the effect setting process (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment are the same process. Therefore, description of the processes of steps S3802 to S3815 is omitted.

The hold effect setting process in step S3801 is executed in order to determine the hold game times for which the hold effect (indication effect and effect for changing the display mode of the hold display) is executed, and to set the content of the hold effect. It is a subroutine that is executed. The details of the holding effect setting process will be described below.

<Hold production setting process>
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the holding effect setting process in the eighth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

In step S3901, a holding effect execution lottery process is executed. The hold effect execution lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to execute the hold effect by lottery. Specifically, a value is obtained from the random number counter for lottery, and whether or not there is a number corresponding to the obtained value of the random number counter among the plurality of numbers stored in the preset table data for lottery. Determine whether. If there is a number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number among the multiple numbers stored in the table data, it is decided to execute the holding effect, and if there is no number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number, the number is held. It is decided not to execute the performance. After executing step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902.

In step S3902, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold effect based on the result of the hold effect execution lottery process. When it is determined in step S3902 that the holding effect is to be executed (S3902: YES), the process proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3902 that the hold effect is not executed (S3902: NO), the hold effect setting process is ended.

In step S3903, the display level upper limit Lvm for each holding game is read. Specifically, the display level upper limit value of each holding game time stored in the first holding effect storage area (see FIG. 92(a)) and the second holding effect storage area (see FIG. 92(b)). Read Lvm. After executing step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904.

In step S3904, the actual display level Lvr of each holding game is read. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr of each holding game time stored in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area is read. After executing step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3905.

In step S3905, the additional level Lva is added to the actual display level Lvr of each holding game time, and the added value in each holding game time is stored. Then, it progresses to step S3906.

In step S3906, the reserved game times of the display level upper limit value Lvm≧actual display level Lvr+additional level Lva are extracted. Specifically, the comparison value of the added value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional level Lva calculated in step S3905 and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are compared at each holding game time, and the added value is displayed level. The reserved game times less than or equal to the upper limit Lvm are extracted. That is, the actual display level Lvr has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is advanced by the level value (additional level Lva) determined for each holding game time. Extract the reserved game times that have room to change. Not limited to the above extraction method, the actual display level Lvr has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is the level value determined for each holding game time. Other extraction methods may be used as long as it is possible to extract a reserved game time that has a room for changing to the upper level by (additional level Lva). After executing step S3906, the process advances to step S3907.

In step S3907, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times, which is the display level upper limit Lvm≧the actual display level Lvr+the additional level Lva, is turned ON. That is, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times, which can change the display mode of the hold display, is turned on. After executing step S3907, the process advances to step S3908.

In step S3908, a pending effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the pending effect content determination processing will be described later. After executing step S3908, the process advances to step S3909.

In step S3909, a holding effect command is transmitted. Specifically, the information regarding the content of the holding effect determined in step S3908 is set as a command and transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After that, the present holding effect setting process ends.

<Deferred production content determination processing>
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the holding effect content determination processing. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 97: S3908) of the hold effect setting process.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not there is a holding game time in which the holding changeable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the holding game times of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area. To do.

If it is determined in step S4001 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4001: NO), this hold effect content determination processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4001 that the hold changeable flag is ON (S4001: YES), the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. In step S4002, when it is determined that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area (S4002: YES), the process proceeds to step S4003.

In step S4003, among the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed first is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. That is, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold game time executed as early as possible is changed. After executing step S4003, the process proceeds to step S4005.

On the other hand, in step S4002, if it is determined that the hold changeable flag is not ON in any of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area (S4002: NO), the process proceeds to step S4004.

In step S4004, among the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the second holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed first is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. Then, it progresses to step S4005.

In step S4005, the value of the hold effect counter Ce is acquired. The holding effect counter Ce is used when the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the effect contents of the holding effect. The hold effect counter Ce is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, after executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006.

In step S4006, the hold effect determination table corresponding to the hold game times for which the display mode of the hold display is changed is referred to.

FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a holding effect determination table. The holding effect determination table is set separately for each holding game time.

In FIG. 99(a), the game time determined as the target for changing the hold display is the hold game time for the first starting opening (n=1) (see FIG. 92(a)) or the second starting opening. In the case of the hold game times (n=1) (see FIG. 92(b)), that is, the hold effect determination used when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88(a). It is a table for use. In the case of n=1, 80 values of 22 to 99 are set as the values of the holding effect counter Ce for which the pattern 1 of the suggested effect (see FIG. 89(a)) is selected. In addition, 20 values 0 to 19 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce for which the pattern 2 of the suggested effect (see FIG. 89B) is selected. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88(a), the probability that the suggestion effect pattern 1 is executed is high.

In FIG. 99(b), the game time determined as the target for changing the hold display is a hold game time for the first starting opening (n=2) or a hold game time for the second starting opening (n=2). 88, that is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88(a) is changed, the hold effect determination table is used. In the case of n=2, the pattern 2 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 89(b)) is selected, and 70 values of 30 to 99 are set as the value of the holding effect counter Ce. Pattern 3 (see FIG. 90(a)) of suggestive effect is selected, and 20 values of 10 to 29 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce. Also, the pattern 4 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90(b)) is selected, and ten values 0 to 9 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88(a), the suggestion effect pattern 2 is most likely to be executed, and then the suggestion effect pattern 3 is executed. The probability is high.

In FIG. 99(c), the game time determined as the target for changing the hold display is the hold game time for the first starting opening (n=3) (see FIG. 92(a)) or the second starting opening. In the case of the hold game times (n=3) (see FIG. 92(b)), that is, the hold effect determination used when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88(a). It is a table for use. When n=3, 80 values of 20 to 99 are set as the values of the holding effect counter Ce for which the pattern 3 of the suggested effect (see FIG. 90A) is selected. In addition, 20 values 0 to 19 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce for which the pattern 4 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90B) is selected. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88(a), the probability that the suggestive effect pattern 3 is executed is high.

In FIG. 99(d), the game time determined as a target for changing the hold display is a hold game time for the first starting opening (n=4) or a hold game time for the second starting opening (n=4). 88, that is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88(a) is changed, the hold effect determination table is used. In the case of n=4, the values 0 to 99 (100) of all the holding effect counters Ce are set in the pattern 4 of the suggested effect (see FIG. 90(b)). That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88(a), the suggestive effect pattern 4 is executed in all cases.

By setting the hold effect determination table as described above, for example, when the gun W2 is displayed, that is, when the suggestion effect pattern 2 is displayed, the hold display Dm11 (Dm21) or Dm12 (Dm22). The display mode of changes. When the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes, only one actual display level Lvr rises to the higher level according to the value of the additional level Lva, but when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes. , The actual display level Lvr goes up by two higher levels according to the value of the additional level Lva.

Further, for example, when the missile W4 is displayed, that is, when the suggestion effect pattern 4 is displayed, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 (Dm22), Dm13 (Dm23), or the hold display Dm14 (Dm24) is Change. When the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises by two levels according to the value of the additional level Lva, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 changes, the additional level. According to the value of Lva, the actual display level Lvr goes up by three levels, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes, the actual display level Lvr goes up by four levels depending on the value of the additional level Lva. Level up.

Therefore, by executing the suggestive effect, the player is roughly made to guess which hold display mode will be changed. Further, since the number of levels at which the actual display level Lvr increases increases depending on the pending display that is the target of changing the display mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After executing step S4006, the process proceeds to step S4007.

In step S4007, the content of the determined holding effect is set in the holding effect command. For example, when it is determined to change the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the suggestion effect to be executed is the suggestion effect (pattern 3), and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed from white to blue. Is set as a command that can identify Then, it progresses to step S4008.

In step S4008, all the hold changeable flags that are turned ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S4009.

In step S4009, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times for which the display mode is changed is updated to Lvr←Lvr+Lva. That is, since the actual display level Lvr is changed (increased) by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for holding effect is changed to the actual value after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of the display level Lvr. After that, the present holding effect content determination processing is ended.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the jackpot random number counter C1 that is later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. When the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of is changed, the hold display is increased so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. The display mode of is changed. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the above-described processing, and thus has the following effects.

Normally, when the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display becomes the target of the big hit lottery, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the displayed pending display in the order of the jackpot lottery is the order in which the jackpot drawing is targeted in the displayed pending display. Is relatively shorter than the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 later, and the remaining display time is relatively short, and the display mode is unlikely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially displays the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. Hope to change. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 that is later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. The display mode of the hold display is changed such that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger as the display mode of (1) is changed. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display that is relatively later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays is changed, the hold display is changed. Since the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display form between before and after the change in the display form is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, further expectation. A feeling can be imparted.

That is, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment holds the hold based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display that is the target for determining the display mode. The display mode of the display is determined. Therefore, by using the hold display of the target whose display mode has been determined, it is possible to suggest the player information about the hold game times corresponding to other hold displays.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, sets the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the information about the pending game times corresponding to the other pending displays by using the pending display for which the display mode is changed.

When determining the display mode of the hold display, a process of determining the display mode of the hold display based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display for which the display mode is determined. As another example, it is possible to execute the following processing.

For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is determined is a jackpot random number counter that is a target of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is more advantageous to the player than the value of C1, the display mode of the hold display, which is the target for determining the display mode, is determined to be a specific display mode, and the information of the hold display itself for which the display mode is determined is set. In addition, information about other pending displays can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player is not limited to guessing the outcome of one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, and is executed before and after that. Various inferences are also made regarding the outcome of the held game times. Therefore, a new playability can be created by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency as compared with the conventional art, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

When changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of which the display mode is changed. As another example of the processing for determining the display mode after the display is changed, the following processing can be executed.

For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the display mode change target hold display of the display mode change The display mode after the change of can be determined. As a result, the following playability can be realized. For example, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the determination by the determination means is preceded by the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is changed. It is possible to change to a display mode at a higher stage than the display mode (display mode that is advantageous to the player). In this way, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the change of the display mode of the hold display is performed. On the other hand, it is possible to draw the player's attention and to give a sense of expectation. In other words, it is possible to let the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestive effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestive effect can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be paid attention. That is, in addition to the effect of performing a suggestive effect such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension to the subsequent game times, a suggestive effect By changing the display mode of the hold display after the above, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and urgency with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display, and to enhance the interest of the synergistic game. be able to.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects a suggestive effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is changed, among the displayed pending displays. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect and to give the player an expectation as to which of the pending displays is the target of which the display mode changes.

In the present embodiment, when executing the suggestive effect, the stepwise width (before the change of the display mode) in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. According to the magnitude of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the actual display level Lvr, a process of selecting a suggestive effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggestive effects to be executed may be adopted. By doing so, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed, the display mode of the one higher level is changed, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, the display mode of the two higher level is changed. When the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, the display mode of the three higher stages is changed when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the display mode of the four higher stage is changed. However, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the suspended display to be changed (actual display between before and after the change of display mode) Other modes may be adopted as the magnitude of the difference between the levels Lvr).

For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, it is changed to the display mode of the one higher level, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, it is changed to the display mode of the four higher level. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, it is changed to a display mode of six higher levels, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, it is changed to a display mode of ten higher levels, etc. In the case of changing the display mode of No. 1, in the held display being displayed, the order in which the jackpot lottery target is changed corresponds to the value of the subsequent jackpot random number counter C1. Specifically, between the pre-change and the post-change in the display mode of the hold display, the stepwise width (before and after the change of the display mode) in a plurality of stages (actual display level Lvr1 to actual display level Lvr5) of the display mode. Other modes may be adopted as long as the display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference of the actual display level Lvr between and becomes larger. The additional holding level values in the first holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92(a) and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92(b) are in the order in which the jackpot lottery is targeted. This can be realized by setting the holding game times such that the order of the jackpot lottery target is a relatively large value as compared with the previous holding game times. In this case, the upper limit of the possible actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm may be set to a value larger than the maximum possible additional display level Lva such as 15 or 20. Further, the pattern of the display mode of the hold display may be set corresponding to each possible value of the actual display level Lvr.

Further, there are a plurality of additional level patterns in which the order of the jackpot lottery target is the later held game times, and the order of the jackpot lottery target is a relatively large value as compared to the previous held game times. May be That is, as in the present embodiment, a pattern in which the value of the additional level Lva corresponding to the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14 is (1, 2, 3, 4), or (2, 4 , 6, 10) and (1, 5, 8, 10) patterns, and a plurality of patterns of the additional level Lva, and which pattern is to be applied may be determined by lottery.

Further, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by applying the processing described in the above embodiment only when a specific condition is satisfied. Further, a case where the display mode of the hold display is changed by applying the process described in the above embodiment and a case where the display mode of the hold display is changed without applying the process described in the above embodiment are determined by lottery. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, but the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, etc. , May be determined based on various parameters associated with each holding game time. Further, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be determined based on a plurality of parameters among these various parameters. For example, the values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are set to a higher value in the case of a big hit than in the case of a miss based on the big hit random number counter C1, and the big hit type counter is set. Based on the value of C2, the probability variation jackpot may be set higher than the normal jackpot case. Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, when the reach is generated, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be set higher than when the reach is not generated.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. First, the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the ninth embodiment, and then the details of the processing will be described. Since the hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

I1. Overview of processing by the gaming machine:
The feature of this embodiment is that, like the eighth embodiment, a holding effect (an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display and a suggestion effect) is executed. The difference from the eighth embodiment is how to change the display mode of the hold display.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. The more the display mode is changed, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display (actual between the before and after the change of the display mode). The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the display levels Lvr) becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, a hold higher than the display mode of the hold game times hold display executed prior to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed Change to display. More precisely, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode.

As a specific example using FIG. 88(a), for example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is green, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is white, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, , The display mode is changed to a higher display mode than green, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11 which is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, the display mode of red or yellow, which is a display mode higher than that of green, is changed.

As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is blue, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is green, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is white, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, The display mode is changed to a higher display mode than blue, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11 that is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm13, and green that is the display mode of the hold display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, it is changed to a display mode of red or yellow which is a display mode higher than blue and green.

Even when changing the display modes of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display region Ds2, the display modes of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display region Ds1 are changed. Similarly, when changing the display mode of the hold display, it is changed to a higher hold display than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed prior to the hold display for which the display mode is changed.

Further, similarly to the eighth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display. .. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is to be changed, among the displayed pending displays.

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

In FIG. 100, suggestive effect (Pattern 1), suggestive effect (Pattern 2), suggestive effect that is executed prior to changing each display mode of the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14. (Pattern 3) and suggestive effect (Pattern 4) are shown.

This suggestive production is a production that imitates a long jump. For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the suggestive effect (pattern 1) is executed. The suggestive effect (Pattern 1) is an effect in which the character Ch makes a jump and then jumps to get on the hold display Dm11. After the suggestive effect (pattern 1) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the suggestive effect (pattern 4) is executed. The suggestive effect (Pattern 4) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after running and gets on the hold display Dm14. After the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes.

Even when the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2 is changed, the same effect as the suggestion effect described above is executed, and then the hold display Dm21, the hold display Dm22, The display mode of the hold display Dm23 or the hold display Dm24 changes.

The above-mentioned suggestion effect is an effect in which the hold display for changing the display mode is determined according to the flight distance of the jump after the character Ch has run. Therefore, for example, by prolonging the airborne time after the character Ch jumps, it is possible to make the player guess which hold display will be landed and to give a sense of expectation and tension.

Hereinafter, an example of processing for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

I2. Processing details:
In this description, differences from the processing in the eighth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a storage area for holding effect in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect storage area in the ninth embodiment includes a first hold effect storage area and a second hold effect storage area, as in the eighth embodiment. 101A shows the first holding effect storage area, and FIG. 101B shows the second holding effect storage area.

The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area of the present embodiment do not include a storage area for storing the additional level Lva. In the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed for each holding game time, but is a holding game time of a holding display for changing the display mode in the process of a series of processing for changing the display mode of the holding display. It is determined (see FIG. 104: step S4305). The rest effect storage area of the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the eighth embodiment in other respects, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Holding effect parameter setting process>
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the holding effect parameter setting process in the ninth embodiment. The holding effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

The difference between the holding effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment and the holding effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment is that the holding effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment is the addition performed in the eighth embodiment. This means that there is no process (FIG. 93: S3603) for setting the level Lva in the hold information storage area 64b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed for each holding game time in the holding information storage area 64b, but is determined in the process of a series of processing for changing the display mode of the holding display. To be done. Therefore, in the holding effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment, the process of setting the additional level Lva is not executed.

The other processes are the same as the holding effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Since the processing contents of the display level upper limit value setting processing, which is a subroutine executed in step S4101, are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Hold production setting process>
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the holding effect setting process in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

Steps S4201 to S4204 of the holding effect setting process in the present embodiment and steps S3901 to S3904 of the holding effect setting process (FIG. 97) in the eighth embodiment are the same process. Therefore, the processing after step S4205 will be described.

The process of steps S4205 to S4209 is a process executed to extract a pending display whose display mode can be changed. That is, this is a process of extracting a hold display that can be changed to a higher hold display than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game time executed before the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed.

In step S4205, the actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm of each holding game time recorded in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area are read, and whichever hold is executed first. The reserved game times in which the display level upper limit Lvm having a value larger than the actual display level Lvr of the game times is recorded are extracted.

To explain using the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101A as an example, the display level upper limit Lvm (=4) of the hold game times (n=3) (hold display Dm13) is the hold game times ( Since it is larger than the value of the actual display level Lvr of any of the holding game times executed before n=3), the condition in step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, the reserved game number (n=3) is the game number extracted in step S4205.

On the other hand, the display level upper limit value Lvm (=1) of the hold game times (n=2) (hold display Dm12) is the same as the hold game times (n=1) executed before the hold game times (n=2). Since it is smaller than the actual display level Lvr (=2), the condition in step S4205 is not satisfied. Therefore, the reserved game times (n=2) are game times not extracted in step S4205.

In the hold game times, there is no game time executed before the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21. That is, in the first hold effect storage area, there is no game time to be executed before the hold game time (n=1). Further, in the second hold effect storage area, there is no game time to be executed before the hold game time (n=1). Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether or not the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21 satisfy the condition of step S4205. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, when the hold game times are present, it is automatically regarded as satisfying the condition in step S4205, Extracted in the process. After executing step S4205, the process advances to step S4206.

In step S4206, the hold game times for which the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr is extracted from the hold game times extracted in step S4205. That is, the reserved game times that have room for changing the display mode are extracted.

To explain using the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101A as an example, the actual display level Lvr (=1) of the hold game times (n=3) (hold display Dm13) is the display level upper limit value Lvm( = 4) less than. Therefore, in this case, the reserved game times (n=3) satisfy the condition in step S4206 and are extracted by the processing.

After executing step S4206, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4207, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times extracted in the process of step S4206 is turned on. After executing step S4207, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4208, a pending effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the pending effect content determination processing will be described later. After executing step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

In step S4209, a holding effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information regarding the content of the hold effect determined in step S4208 is set as a command and transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After that, the present holding effect setting process ends.

<Deferred production content determination processing>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the holding effect content determination processing in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 103: S4208) of the hold effect parameter setting process.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not there is a holding game time in which the holding changeable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the holding game times of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area. To do.

If it is determined in step S4301 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4301: NO), this hold effect content determination processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4301 that the hold changeable flag is ON (S4301: YES), the process proceeds to step S4302.

In step S4302, it is determined whether the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. In step S4302, when it is determined that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area (S4302: YES), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4303, of the holding game times in which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed most recently is determined as a target for changing the display mode of the holding display. In the above-described eighth embodiment, in step S4003 (FIG. 98), among the holding game times in which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed first is displayed in a reserved manner. However, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the hold game time that is executed most recently. In the present embodiment, as described in step S4205 of the hold effect setting process (FIG. 103), in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, if the hold game times are present, It is automatically regarded as satisfying the condition in step S4205, and is extracted in the process. Therefore, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, there is a high possibility that the hold changeable flag will be ON, and in step S4303, similarly to the processing in the eighth embodiment, the first If the hold game time executed first among the hold game times whose hold changeable flag is ON in the hold effect storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display Dm11 has a high probability. Also, the hold display Dm21 becomes a target for changing the display mode, and it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of expectation or tension even if the display mode of the hold display is changed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time executed most recently is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. To do. After executing step S4303, the process advances to step S4305.

On the other hand, in step S4302, when it is determined that the hold changeable flag is not ON in any of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area (S4302: NO), the process proceeds to step S4304.

In step S4304, of the holding game times in which the holding changeable flag is ON in the second holding effect storage area, the holding game time executed most recently is determined as a target for changing the display mode of the hold display. After executing step S4304, the process advances to step S4305.

In step S4305, the additional display level Lva is determined. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display, how much higher the display mode is changed is determined. More specifically, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display is determined.

Specifically, the difference value between the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is changed is calculated, and one value is determined from the difference values. To do. For example, when the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm13 shown in the first holding effect recording area of FIG. 101A is determined as the target for changing the display mode, the display level upper limit value Lvm (= of the holding display Dm13 is set. 4) and the difference value (=3) between the actual display level Lvr (=1) is calculated. Then, one value is determined from the values from 1 to 3 which is the difference value, and the determined value is determined as the additional display level Lva. As a method of determining one value, a random number may be used, or the maximum possible value (3 in this specific example) may always be adopted. In this way, the additional display level Lva is determined. After executing step S4305, the process advances to step S4306.

In step S4306, the content of the holding effect is determined. Specifically, the content of the suggestive effect according to the pending display of the target whose display mode is changed and the display mode of the changed pending display are determined. For example, when the target whose display mode is changed is the hold display Dm11, the suggestive effect is determined to be the suggestive effect (pattern 1) shown in FIG. Similarly, when the target whose display mode is changed is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14, the suggestive effect (pattern 2), the suggestive effect (pattern 3), or the suggestive effect ( Select pattern 4).

Further, when determining the display mode of the changed hold display, the added value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional display level Lva of the hold display of which the display mode is changed is calculated, and the added value is dealt with. The display mode is determined based on the correspondence between the actual display level Lvr shown in FIG. 88(b) and the display mode of the hold display. For example, when the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm13 shown in the first holding effect recording area of FIG. 101(a) is determined as the target whose display mode is changed, the additional display level Lva is set to 2. In this case, since the added value of the actual display level Lvr (=1) and the additional display level Lva (=2) is 3, the actual display level Lvr and the hold display mode shown in FIG. 88(b) are displayed. The display mode of the changed hold display is determined to be green based on the correspondence relationship with. After executing step S4306, the process advances to step S4307.

In step S4307, the content of the determined holding effect is set in the holding effect command. Then, it progresses to step S4308.

In step S4308, all the hold changeable flags that are turned ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S4309.

In step S4309, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times for which the display mode is changed is updated to Lvr←Lvr+Lva. That is, since the actual display level is changed by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for holding effect is changed to the actual display level Lvr after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of. After that, the present holding effect content determination processing is ended.

As described above, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a target of the big hit lottery prior to the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display which is the target of changing the display mode. The jackpot random number counter C1 is changed to a higher display mode than the hold display mode. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the above-described processing, and thus has the following effects.

For example, when there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player displays the display mode of the specific hold display. You may want to change. However, contrary to the desire of the player, the pending display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery after the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display in which the player desires to change the display mode. The display mode of may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the predetermined hold display, the big hit random number counter C1 that is a target of the big hit lottery is preceded by the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the predetermined hold display. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the corresponding display mode of the hold display. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the player's wish, the display of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery after the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Even when the mode is changed, the hold display in which the display mode is changed is changed to a higher display mode than the display mode of the hold display in which the player desires to change the display mode. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the above and, rather, to give a further expectation.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when determining the display mode of the hold display, corresponds to another hold display different from the hold display for which the display mode is determined, as in the case of the eighth embodiment. The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1. Therefore, by using the hold display of the target whose display mode has been determined, it is possible to suggest the player information about the hold game times corresponding to other hold displays.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, sets the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the information about the pending game times corresponding to the other pending displays by using the pending display whose display mode is changed.

Further, similarly to the eighth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display and to give a sense of expectation. In other words, it is possible to let the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestive effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestive effect can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be paid attention. That is, in addition to the effect of performing a suggestive effect such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension to the subsequent game times, a suggestive effect By changing the display mode of the hold display after the above, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and urgency with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display, and to enhance the interest of the synergistic game. be able to.

In the present embodiment, when executing the suggestive effect, the stepwise width (before the change of the display mode) in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. According to the magnitude of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the actual display level Lvr, a process of selecting a suggestive effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggestive effects to be executed may be adopted. By doing so, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type.

J. Tenth Embodiment:
It is also possible to employ suggestive effects different from those of the eighth and ninth embodiments. Hereinafter, other suggestive effects that can be adopted will be described.

<Other example 1 of suggestive production>
FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggested effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 1 of the suggested effect. As shown in FIG. 105(a), in the suggestion effect of this another example, the player selects a hold display which is a target for changing the display mode. Specifically, at the same time when the game time is started, a display is displayed on the display surface 41a that prompts the player to select a hold display whose display mode is to be changed within the time limit by operating the effect operation buttons 24. To do. The time limit is set to a time that allows the player to select the hold display within the variation time of the game cycle being executed, for example, set to a time shorter than the variation time of the game cycle to be executed by 1 second. To do.

Each time the player operates the effect operation button 24, the arrow YJ displayed on the hold display moves one position to the left, and the effect operation button 24 operates after the arrow YJ moves to the end of the existing hold display. When it is done, the arrow YJ is moved again onto the hold display Dm11.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), at the timing when the time limit has expired, another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105(b)) is temporarily displayed on the hold display located under the arrow YJ. By doing so, the player cannot see the hold display.

After that, if the display mode can be changed, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode as shown in FIG. 105(c).

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

Hereinafter, the process for realizing the suggested effect in the different example 1 will be specifically described.

FIG. 106 is a storage area for holding effect in another example 1. 106(a) shows a first holding effect storage area in another example 1, and FIG. 106(b) shows a second holding effect storage area in another example 1. The storage area for holding effect in another example 1 includes a storage area for storing the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to each holding game time. The method of determining the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the value of the actual display level Lvr of each holding game time is the same as in the above eighth embodiment and ninth embodiment, and is determined in the holding effect parameter setting process.

In the suggestion effect, when the time limit has elapsed and the hold game time selected by the player has been determined, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in the selected hold game time, and the display level upper limit value. When Lvm>actual display level Lvr, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold game number selected by the player is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 is the display level upper limit Lvm>actual display level Lvr, so the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is The display mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). That is, the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (=1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed to the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4) is displayed. Change the mode. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

If the hold game time selected by the player is not the display level upper limit Lvm>actual display level Lvr (for example, the hold display Dm11 in FIG. 106(a)), the display mode of the selected hold display is Do not change.

In addition, the suggestive effect in the different example 1 can be applied to the above eighth embodiment and ninth embodiment.

First, a case where the suggestive effect in the different example 1 is applied to the eighth embodiment will be described. In the above-described eighth embodiment, the first hold effect among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in step S4003 or step S4004 (FIG. 98) when determining the hold display for changing the display mode. The holding display corresponding to the holding game time executed first in the storage area for storage or the second holding production storage area is determined as a target for changing the display mode, but instead of the process, the player performs a production operation. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by operating the button 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by operating the effect operation button 24 is not ON. In this case, a process of not changing the hold display may be applied.

Then, when the suggestion effect of another example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located below the arrow is temporarily changed to another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105(b)). By displaying it, the player can not visually recognize the hold display.

After that, if the display mode can be changed, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode as shown in FIG. 105(c).

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

By doing this, a new playability is created in which the player selects the hold display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency. Further, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed, the order in which the hold display selected by the player among the existing hold displays is the target of the jackpot lottery is later. , The number of steps of rank increase of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display, which is the target of the display mode change, is increased, and the same effect as that of the eighth embodiment is achieved, and the game is also performed. It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation.

Next, a case where the suggestion effect in the different example 1 is applied to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the above-described ninth embodiment, the first hold effect among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in step S4303 or step S4304 (FIG. 104) when determining the hold display for changing the display mode. The holding display corresponding to the holding game number executed most later in the storage area for storage or the second holding production storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode, but instead of the processing, the player operates the production operation button. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the operation of 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by operating the effect operation button 24 is not ON. May be applied to the process of not changing the hold display.

Then, when the suggestion effect of another example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located below the arrow is temporarily changed to another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105(b)). By displaying it, the player can not visually recognize the hold display.

After that, if the display mode can be changed, the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode as shown in FIG. 105(c).

On the other hand, when the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

By doing this, a new playability is created in which the player selects the hold display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency. Further, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed, it is higher than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed prior to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Since the display is changed to the hold display, the same effect as that of the ninth embodiment can be obtained, and the player can be provided with an expectation.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the other example 1 can create a new playability such as allowing the player to select the hold display in the suggestion effect. In addition, as described above, the suggestive effect for allowing the player to select the hold display in the other example 1 can be applied to the above eighth embodiment and ninth embodiment. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed depending on whether the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is ON. Therefore, it is possible to create new playability such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player himself changes.

In this case, if the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is not ON, the display mode of the hold display is not changed despite execution of the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to reverse the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display is changed after the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to give the game an unexpected effect. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described in the eighth embodiment, also in the other example 1, when executing the suggestive effect, a plurality of set display modes between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed is performed. A suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared in accordance with the size of the stepwise width (difference in the actual display level Lvr between before and after the change of the display mode) in each stage. You may employ the process which does. By doing so, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type.

<Other example 2 of suggestive production>
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggested effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggested effect. FIG. 107(a) shows a state of suggestive effect in this another example. FIG.107(b) has shown the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after completion|finish of the suggestion production in this another example.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the suggestive effect of this another example is the suggestive effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in this another example, the missile W5 explodes without hitting any of the hold displays, even though the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display which is the target of changing the display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 107(b), the display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a does not change after the suggestion effect in this another example is executed, even though the suggestion effect is executed. .. Hereinafter, a specific process will be described.

This second modified example also uses the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 106. Then, the hold display to be the target of changing the display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined pending game times, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, FIG. 90 of the eighth embodiment ( Like the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in b), the suggestion effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm. Change to.

For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 is the display level upper limit Lvm>the actual display level Lvr. A suggestive effect similar to the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in 90(b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). That is, the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (=1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed to the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4) is displayed. Change the mode. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

On the other hand, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is changed, when the display level upper limit value Lvm>the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied, it is shown in FIG. Perform suggestive performance.

By executing the suggestion effect in the second example as described above in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. The recognition can be overturned, and the game can be given unexpectedness. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Other example 3 of suggestive production>
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggestive effect. FIG. 108(a) shows a state of suggestive effect in this another example. FIG.108(b) has shown the reservation display displayed on the display surface 41a after completion|finish of the suggestion production in this another example.

As shown in FIG. 108(a), the suggestive effect of the present another example is the suggestive effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in the present another example, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode, and as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a does not change after the suggestive effect is finished.

The suggestive effect can be realized by executing the same processing as that of the second modification. Specifically, the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 106 are used. Then, the hold display to be the target of changing the display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined pending game times, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, in FIG. 90(b) of the eighth embodiment. Like the suggested effect (Pattern 4) shown, a suggestive effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. ..

For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 is the display level upper limit Lvm>the actual display level Lvr. A suggestive effect similar to the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in 90(b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4). That is, the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (=1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed to the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (=4) is displayed. Change the mode. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

On the other hand, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is changed, when the display level upper limit Lvm>the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied, the suggestion effect in FIG. To execute.

By executing the suggestion effect in the third example as described above in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. The recognition can be overturned, and the game can be given unexpectedness. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Other example 4 of suggestive production>
After the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays may be changed. For example, in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 106, when the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in two or more adjacent hold game times, The display mode of the two or more adjacent hold displays is changed at substantially the same time.

Further, prior to changing the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays, for example, the following suggestive effect can be executed.

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggested effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 4 of the suggested effect. FIG. 109A shows a state of suggestive effect in this another example. FIG. 109(b) shows a hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect in this another example is finished.

As shown in FIG. 109(a), the suggestive effect of this another example is the suggestive effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode. In the suggestion effect of this another example, the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode, and hits two adjacent hold displays. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(b), the display mode of two adjacent hold displays changes,

By executing such suggestive effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation as to how many display modes of the hold display are changed after the suggestive effect is executed.

K. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example.

K1. Modification 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the suggestion effect is executed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect are executed, but the suggestion effect is not limited to such a configuration. May be omitted. Even if the suggested effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game time in the second game time, even though the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to expect that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Even if the suggestive effect is omitted, the game time reproduction effect is executed due to the fact that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Unexpectedness can be imparted.

K2. Modification 2:
In case a2 of the first embodiment and case c2 of the third embodiment described above, the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game time, the suggestion effect may be executed before the game time reproduction effect. That is, if the timing is before the reproduction of the already executed effect, the suggestion effect can be executed at an arbitrary timing. Even if such a configuration is adopted, since the suggestion effect is executed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect are executed, for example, the effect executed in the second game time has already been performed. It is possible for the player to strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of the executed effect.

K3. Modification 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the target of reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the game time when the jackpot is achieved. A performance executed in a non-bonus game time, for example, a reach performance in a missed (reachable) game time may be a target for reproduction in a special game state reproduction effect and a game time reproduction effect, or a missed game (no reach) The notice production at the time may be the target of reproduction.

K4. Modification 4:
The first game time and the second game time defined in the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two game times that are continuously executed. For example, another game time may exist between the first game time and the second game time.

K5. Modification 5:
In the first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be executed in the ending period of the special game state is determined based on special information related to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state. did. For example, in the first embodiment, the effects executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time are the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9). Alternatively, as shown in the case a2, it is determined whether to be the suggestive effect based on the special information related to the second game time executed after the special game state, but the invention is not limited to such a structure. The effect to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggestion effect or the special game state reproduction effect, and any other effect is adopted. Good. For example, other effects such as a normal reach effect (a reach effect that is not the target of the special game state reproduction effect) or an effect executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to perform an effect in the special game state in consideration of special information related to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect that is related to the effect executed in the predetermined game time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

K6. Modification 6:
The processes executed in the first to fourth embodiments may be combined. That is, the case a1 (FIG. 9(a)) and the case a2 (FIG. 9(b)), which are the processes executed in the first embodiment, and the processes (FIGS. 46(a) and (b)) executed in the second embodiment. ), a case c1 (FIG. 48(a)) and a case c2 (FIG. 48(b)) which are processes executed in the third embodiment, and a case d1 (FIG. 49(a) which is processes executed in the fourth embodiment. )) and case d2 (FIG. 49(b)), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used together. As a result, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined processing. For example, it is possible to improve the player's attention level and expectation level with respect to effects that reproduce already executed effects such as special game state reproduction effects and game time reproduction effects.

K7. Modification 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition has been described as an example in which the jackpot lottery is won. However, the predetermined condition is that the jackpot lottery is won. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a case may be adopted in which the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied. As described above, even if another condition is set as the predetermined condition, the same effect as the effect described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

K8. Modification 8:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments described above, three types of images of objects A to C are adopted as the object images used for the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, two types of object images may be used as the object image used for the notice effect, or four types of object images may be used. In this way, even if an arbitrary number of object images are adopted, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the above embodiment. Also, various contents can be adopted as the contents of each object.

K9. Modification 9:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments described above, the expectation level of the jackpot is shown to the player as the situation of the game depending on how to combine the images of the objects displayed as the notice effect. As a game situation such as a degree, an expectation that the current game state is a probability change state, and the like, a configuration may be adopted in which various game situations are shown to the player.

K10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the display pattern table of each of the objects A, B, and C has three types: jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). In this case, the display pattern random numbers are distributed, but, for example, the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is further divided into 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot, The effect by the object B may be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of a probability variation jackpot. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which the latent probability variation state exists, the effect by the object C may be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability variation state of the current game time. As described above, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (for example, jackpot expectation or The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game, such as the probability of probability variation jackpot) may be indicated.

K11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement/timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the placement position (coordinates) of each object is set so as to change over time. It may be. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is The arrangement and display start timing of the display objects are set in the arrangement/timing setting table so as not to overlap each other.

K12. Modification 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed without displaying the image frame, but the display pattern (A1 The image frames A1, A2 and A3 displayed as -A2-A3) may not be displayed. Further, the same processing may be performed on other object images.

K13. Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the arrangement and the display start timing for each combination of object images displayed as the notice effect by the arrangement/timing setting table as shown in FIG. 55. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, even in the notice effect in which the object A and the object B are displayed, the notice effect in which (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) are combined and the notice effect in which (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) are combined. There are multiple types of notice effects, such as notice effects. The arrangement of each object image and the display start timing may be set for each of the plurality of types of notice effects. By doing so, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

K14. Modification 14:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are related to each other. The relative arrangement position between the objects and the display timing are set so as to be displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having the above. Specifically, it is set to be displayed in a mode having a narrative property as a related mode, but is set to be displayed in a mode having a plurality of objects as a related mode. Various modes can be adopted as a mode in which a plurality of objects are related to each other, such as a configuration in which a plurality of objects are associated with each other and a configuration in which a plurality of objects are set to be displayed in a mode having a predetermined rule.

K15. Modification 15:
The display patterns set in the display pattern tables described in the fifth and sixth embodiments are not limited to the modes shown in the above embodiments, and display patterns of other modes may be adopted. You can For example, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the BC display pattern table. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of the dog in the box, and gives the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a display pattern showing that the dog in the box gets wet due to the bad weather. It is possible to give the player recognition that the situation is disadvantageous, it is possible to execute various effects by combining the respective objects, and it is possible to effectively use the objects.

K16. Modification 16:
In the sixth embodiment, as the image used for the notice effect, the object A, the object B, the object C, or an image in which these are combined is adopted, but other images may be adopted.

FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for the notice production. The object D is composed of three images, that is, an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and is an image that changes with time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. FIG. 110(a) shows the image D1, FIG. 110(b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 110(c) shows the image D3. As shown in the figure, the object D represents a love pattern between a male character and a female character. Specifically, the image D1 shows a male character and a female character gazing at each other with a certain distance. The image D2 represents a male character and a female character gazing at each other at a short distance. The image D3 shows that the male character and the female character are holding hands and making good friends. Further, in the image D3, a state in which the female character talks to the male character so as to keep secret from the female character's father that he/she is getting along well is represented.

In the object D composed of images of such contents, it is depicted that the romance of the man and woman is fulfilled as the images progress in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. Image D3 gives a generally better impression than image D2. That is, the image D1 to the image D2 and the image D2 to the image D3 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine according to the modified example 16 includes the D display pattern table as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach), non-display and display pattern, respectively. Four display patterns of (D1), display pattern (D1-D2), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are assigned. In the D display pattern table, the display pattern display pattern (D1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of deviation (without reach), and in the case of deviation (with reach), Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned to be higher.

The pachinko machine according to the present modification further executes a notice effect in which the image D is combined with the object D as another image.

FIG. 111 shows an image in which the image D is combined with the object D (object D+image E). As shown in the figure, an image E which is an image combined with the object D expresses the father of the female character. The object D+image E is composed of three images: [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E]. [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E],[image D] It is an image that changes with time in the order of D3+image E]. 111(a) shows [image D1+image E], FIG. 111(b) shows [image D2+image E], and FIG. 111(c) shows [image D3+image E]. As shown in the figure, the object D+image E shows how the father of the female character looks at the love pattern of the male character and the female character from behind the pillar. Specifically, in [Image D1+Image E], a male character and a female character are staring at each other at a certain distance, and the female character's father is looking from behind the pillars. Has been done. [Image D2+Image E] shows that the male character and the female character are gazing at each other at a short distance, and the female character's father is looking from behind the pillar. In [Image D3+Image E], the male character and the female character hold hands, and the female character talks to the male character to keep the friendship of the female character from the father of the female character. The female character's father is seen from behind the pillar.

The object D+image E composed of images of such contents has a female character and a father as the images progress in the order of [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E]. It is speculated that the parent-child relationship will deteriorate. Therefore, as the images progress in the order of [image D1+image E], [image D2+image E], and [image D3+image E], a generally bad impression is given. In other words, [Image D3+Image E] gives [Image D2+Image E] and [Image D2+Image E] gives [Image D1+Image E] a generally good impression. That is, the [image D2+image E] from the [image D3+image E] and the [image D1+image E] from the [image D2+image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

The object D+image E is displayed as an effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery decreases as the image D1+image E, image D2+image E, and image D3+image E progress. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine according to the modified example 16 includes the DE display pattern table as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of the jackpot, the out (with reach), and the out (without reach), the non-display and the display pattern, respectively. Four display patterns are assigned: (D1/E), display pattern (D1-D2/E), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3/E). In the display pattern table for DE, in the case of detachment (without reach), the display pattern (D1-D2-D3/E) among the above four display patterns is displayed most frequently, and the display pattern of detachment (with reach) is displayed. In the case of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2/E) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1/E) is the most displayed of the four display patterns. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency of performing is increased.

By doing so, the same effect as that of the sixth embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modified example, when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E, the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E. The image D3 is displayed in combination with the image E when the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E even though the player is favorably recognized about the game situation. It is possible to give the player more favorable recognition of the game situation than when the game is displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, the player can be given various kinds of recognition about the situation of the game by modifying the combination of the images and the contents of the images.

Further, the probability that the jackpot lottery is won when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E, as compared with the case where the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E. Despite being high, the case where the image D1 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a is larger than the case where the image D3 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a. The probability of winning is high. Therefore, when a predetermined image is combined with an effect image that steps up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation increases, it is possible to give the player a completely different recognition of the game situation. it can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 or the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on whether or not the image E is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the image displayed on the display surface 41a. It should be noted that the above-described effect has been described by taking the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, but the above-described effect is also exhibited between the image D1 and the image D2 and between the image D2 and the image D3.

K17. Modification 17:
In the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the output mode of the sound is changed to zero while the output volume of the background music is reduced with the passage of time while continuing to output the background music. Although it is configured to shift to a certain aspect, instead of this, when the transition condition is satisfied, a mode in which the volume of the background music is reduced over time while the output of the background music is continued while the output of the background music is continued. Instead, the configuration may be such that the volume of the background music is shifted to zero.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to a mode in which the demo video is displayed after 5 seconds have elapsed since the volume of the background music became zero. However, instead of this, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 may be changed to a mode in which the demo moving image is displayed at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

In the above embodiment, the background music output itself continues until 5 seconds elapse after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and the background music output is stopped after 5 seconds elapses. Alternatively, the background music output may be stopped at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

K18. Modification 18:
In the above-described embodiment, if the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11 ), the temporal beginning of the background video is set. Although the display is started from the position "01" and the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music, the background video and the background music are displayed and output from the temporal start position. It is not limited to the configuration. For example, the background moving image and the background music may be configured to be displayed and output from a predetermined most exciting temporal position (so-called chorus start position). That is, the display is started from the predetermined temporal position of the background video, and the output is performed from the temporal position of the background music that corresponds to the predetermined temporal position of the background video. It may be configured to start. Even with such a configuration, the display of the background video and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized with each other, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background video is started changes according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

K19. Modification 19:
Although the volume of the background music is set to zero when the transition condition is satisfied in the above embodiment, the volume of the background music may not be completely set to zero. For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music may be set to be equal to or lower than the volume that the player cannot recognize. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to let the player recognize that the transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, the output mode of the voice before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode in which the background music is output at the volume of the first loudness, and the output mode of the voice that is transferred after the transition condition is satisfied is the first background music. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the volume is output at the second volume, which is lower than the volume at. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to let the player recognize that the transition condition is satisfied.

K20. Modification 20:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, but before the transition condition is satisfied. The display mode of the symbol display device 41 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 which is shifted after the transition condition is satisfied are not limited to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the mode of displaying the demo moving image. For example, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode of displaying a predetermined moving image, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to be transitioned after the transition condition is satisfied is It may be a mode in which an image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to which the transition is made after the transition condition is satisfied is a mode in which a video different from the predetermined video is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the predetermined video is stopped and displayed, and the predetermined The moving image may be hidden, a still image different from the predetermined moving image may be displayed, or the moving image and the still image may be hidden.

K21. Modification 21:
In the above-described embodiment, a detection sensor that detects that the game ball has been ejected to the game board 30 is provided, and when the game sensor does not detect the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied. It may be configured to. By doing so, the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the transition condition is satisfied even when the player is playing the game, which is uncomfortable for the player. Can be reduced.

Furthermore, it may be configured to determine that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor after the transition condition is satisfied. In this way, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce an uncomfortable situation for the player in which the above does not hold for a long time (for example, one minute).

K22. Modification 22:
In the above embodiment, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected depending on whether the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the player's selection, or the like.

K23. Modification 23:
The time, numerical value, etc. specifically set in the above-described embodiment are merely examples, and can be appropriately set to other time, numerical values, etc. For example, the time from when the fluctuation of the symbols stops until the transition condition is satisfied may be set to other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of the background music becomes zero to when the demo movie starts It may be set to other than 5 seconds.

K24. Modification 24:
In the above-described embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode for displaying the demo moving image, the output mode of the sound is configured such that no music is output and the volume is zero. Alternatively, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode for displaying the demo video, the output mode of the sound is a demo music which is music corresponding to the demo video, and an output level preset by the player. It may be configured to output in (volume).

In such a configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the output of the demo music may start from a predetermined temporal position. With such a configuration, the display of the demo moving image and the output of the demo music can be easily synchronized, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the demo music is started changes. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, a predetermined temporal position of the demo music may be set as the temporal start position of the demo music. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the output of the demo music is started from a position midway in time.

K25. Modification 25:
In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires time information, which is information regarding time, from the RTC 96, and the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. It is configured to start the process for executing the RTC effect when it is determined whether or not they match, but instead of this, the sound emission control device 90 once executes the RTC effect, The elapsed time since the last RTC effect was started is measured, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since the last RTC effect was started, and it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed. In such a case, the processing for executing the RTC effect may be started.

K26. Modification 26:
In the seventh embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 outputs RTC effect music at the output level (volume) preset by the player, but instead, the sound emission control device 90 plays the game. The RTC effect music may be output at the maximum output level (volume) regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the user. With such a configuration, the power of RTC production and the degree of attention can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

K27. Modification 27:
After adopting the configuration of the modification 26, the maximum output level (volume) may be maintained when the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) ends and the background music is output. Good. The effect of such a configuration will be described. Since the player who is listening to the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) is fascinated by the power of the effect executed at the maximum output level (volume), the maximum even after the RTC effect is finished. There may be a request to continue the game at the output level (volume) of. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (volume) even after the RTC effect is finished.

In addition, after adopting the configuration of the modification example 26, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output, the output level (volume set in advance by the player ). With such a configuration, the special feeling of the RTC effect that has been executed can be further emphasized, so that the expectation for the next RTC effect can be further improved and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. it can.

In addition, after adopting the configuration of the modification example 26, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output, the output level (volume) of the voice is set by the player. A volume setting screen for setting may be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the background music may be output at the output level (volume) of the voice designated by the player. The effect of such a configuration will be described. Since the player who is listening to the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) is used to a high volume, the output level (volume) of his/her preference may change from that before the RTC effect music is listened to. Therefore, there may be a request to reset the output level (volume) of the voice to a desired output level after the RTC effect is finished. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to reset the output level (volume) of the sound to a desired output level at the timing after the RTC effect is finished.

K28. Modification 28:
The method for determining the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display may be different from those of the eighth and ninth embodiments. Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one of the held displays among the plurality of held displays is determined to be won in the jackpot lottery by the previous determination process, the plurality of displayed By setting the display mode of the hold display of No. 1 to the display mode of a specific pattern, it is highly possible that the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display among the displayed hold is likely to win the jackpot lottery. , May be suggested to the player. For example, in the case where four hold displays Dm11 to hold display Dm14 are displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display Dm14 is selected in the jackpot lottery by the previous determination process. When it is determined to win, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to white, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to red, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to white, and the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to red. In other words, by changing the display mode of the displayed multiple held displays to a specific pattern such as "white/red/white/red", a jackpot corresponding to one of the displayed held displays. It can be suggested to the player that the random number counter C1 is highly likely to win the jackpot lottery.

In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 in a predetermined holding game time wins the big hit lottery, it is determined by the previous determination process that the hold display of the predetermined holding game time and the predetermined holding game time are generated. By determining the display pattern of the hold display of the hold game times generated thereafter to a specific display pattern, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display among the displayed hold displays is a jackpot lottery. It may be suggested to the player that there is a high probability of winning. In this case, after the predetermined holding game time is generated, the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and the display mode of the holding display of the holding game time corresponding to the entering ball is displayed. When making a decision, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display (a hold display of a predetermined hold game number determined by the previous determination process when the jackpot lottery is won) is different from the hold display of the display mode determination target. It can be realized by determining the display mode of the hold display based on.

K29. Modification 29:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as pachinko machines that generate a big hit when a right is generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and sparrow balls.

Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the reel starts to rotate.

Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

L. Inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments and the like:
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic A1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means (the MPU 62, MPU 92 and MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments),
When the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced (processing of case a2 in the first embodiment, processing in the second embodiment, case in the third embodiment). The process of c2 and the process of case d1 in the fourth embodiment are executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic A1, although the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time. Since it is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information regarding the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. After that, the notification means notifies the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game time, and then the player is made aware that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, thereby playing the game. Can be given unexpectedness. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine described in Feature A1, further comprising:
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player is started after the game times related to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition.
The effect execution means,
In the first case where the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
After the start of the special game state executed after the first game time and before the start of the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. (The processing of case a1 in the first embodiment and the processing of case c1 in the third embodiment are executed),
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition for the second time,
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced (processing of case a2 in the first embodiment, processing in the second embodiment, case in the third embodiment). Execute the process of c2)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic A2, if the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is equivalent to the effect already executed. It acts as a replicator and the player recognizes that way. On the other hand, if the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced as the effect already executed in the effect. However, in practice, it is executed because the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game time, when the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the second time is not reached until the second time. The reproduction executed in the game time does not simply reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, but is caused by the special information regarding the second game time satisfying a predetermined condition. Then, the player recognizes that it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness and give the player a sense of expectation for the reproduction of the effect that has already been executed.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The effect execution means,
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, a suggestion effect suggesting that the effect already executed is reproduced before the reproduction (the first embodiment). To a suggestive effect executed in the fourth embodiment).

According to the characteristic A3, since the suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, the effect executed in the second game time is the first game. It is possible for the player to strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game. After that, by notifying the result of the determination of the special information relating to the second game time by the notifying means, the player is made aware that the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Unexpectedness can be added to the game.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine described in Feature A3,
The effect execution means,
When another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic A4, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. And the reproduction can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The object reproduced by the effect execution means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game time before the first game time, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game time. (Including processing of case c1 and processing of case c2 in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic A5, even when a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. ..

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to a player,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the characteristic A6, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is the effect of the effect executed in the first game time. Although it is executed as at least a part of reproduction, it is actually executed because the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting the expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player, and at least the effect executed in the first game time. In the case of being executed as a part of the reproduction, and on the effect, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, the case where it is executed due to satisfying the condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest, and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature B1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Game times (first to third embodiments) executed after a specific game time (first game time in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A second game time) in which the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined.

According to the feature B1, since the timing of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined based on the special information regarding the game time executed after the specific game time, it is special for the reproduction. It is possible to add various meanings, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player with respect to the reproduction, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine described in Feature B1,
The effect execution means,
Before the determination means, it is determined whether or not the special information related to a game time executed after a specific game time, which is a game time when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, satisfies the predetermined condition (step S1022). Along with running
Based on the result of the determination executed before the determination means, the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined (the processing of steps S2302 to S2312 is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic B2, by performing before the determination means whether or not the special information relating to the game time executed after the specific game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the effect of the effect executed at the specific game time can be achieved. The effect in the game time to be executed before the game time in which it is decided to reproduce at least a part can be determined in consideration of the game time to execute the reproduction. Therefore, for example, as the effect in the game time to be executed before the game time in which it is decided to execute the reproduction, it is possible to execute the effect related to the reproduction.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
The effect execution means,
Among the game times executed after the specific game time, the special times that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the case a2 of the first embodiment, the second case c2 of the second embodiment and the third embodiment). The game machine) is characterized in that at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is reproduced.

According to the feature B3, at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is reproduced in the game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is executed. It is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the game time that is fulfilled satisfies a predetermined condition. Surprisingness is imparted to the game by notifying the player that the special information related to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition only after the result of the determination of the special information related to the game time is notified by the notification means. be able to. That is, by making the game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by executing a suggestion effect that suggests reproducing an already executed effect, before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time.

According to the feature B4, since the suggestive effect that suggests reproducing the effect that has already been executed is executed, the player's attention level and interest level can be increased with respect to the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time. Can be improved. Further, when reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is executed in the game time in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, by executing the suggestion effect, the game time in which the reproduction is further executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information related to “1” satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
A gaming machine described in Feature B4,
The effect execution means,
When another game time exists between the specific game time and the game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time,
The suggestion effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game times).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic B5, even if there is another game time between the specific game time and the game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, it is suggested in the other game time. By executing the effect, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the suggested effect and the effect executed in the specific game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
In the case where the effect execution means reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time,
The target to be reproduced by the performance executing unit is a performance executed in the specific game time, and includes a reach performance that is a performance that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature B6, the reach effect, which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, is actually executed based on the special information related to the game time. By making the player recognize that, the game can be given an unexpectedness. In addition, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time. When it is executed as a reproduction, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, but in reality, it is determined that the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, the case where it is executed due to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest, and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic C1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Special game state starting means for starting a special game state for granting a privilege to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
When the special game state is executed, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information related to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state (first embodiment). In case a1 and case a2 in the second embodiment, and in case c1 and case c2 in the third embodiment, the effect in the special game state after the first game time is determined by whether or not the jackpot lottery in the second game time is successful. Determine/S1201 to S1209, S2601 to S2609)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic C1, it is possible to execute an effect in the special game state in consideration of special information related to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect which is related to the effect executed in the predetermined game time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic C2]
A gaming machine described in Feature C1,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the special game state is executed, and in the first case where the special information related to the predetermined game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. (In the case a1 in the first embodiment and the case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special game state after the first game time),
In the case where the special game state is executed, and the special information related to the predetermined game time is the second condition that satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is generated in the predetermined game time. Execute (in case a2 in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, and in case c2 in the third embodiment, reproduction effect is executed in the second game time)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic C2, when the special information related to the predetermined game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect executed in the special game state is satisfied by the special information related to the predetermined game time. In this case, by executing the game at the predetermined game time, it is possible to let the player recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed has a special meaning. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game with unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The game machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state.

According to the feature C3, at least the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state in the predetermined game time, even though the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Since a part is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to a predetermined game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the predetermined game time is notified by the notification means, the player is made aware that the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition, thereby making the game unexpected. Can be granted. That is, by expanding the predetermined game times that the player does not expect, the player can be surprised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic C4]
A gaming machine described in Feature C3,
When the game time executed before the special game state is defined as a first game time, and the predetermined game time executed after the special game state is defined as a second game time,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes an effect executed by the effect executing unit in the first game time when the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduction). The target production is the case a1 and the case a2 of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the case c1 and the case c2 of the third embodiment. (Including the effects executed in the game times)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic C4, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and is executed in the first game time. The effect is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, only when the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, in terms of effect, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game time. However, in reality, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second game time has been executed because the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and give the game unexpectedness. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for reproduction.

[Characteristic C5]
A gaming machine described in Feature C3 or Feature C4,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the characteristic C5, when the special information relating to a predetermined game time (second game time) satisfies a predetermined condition, in the game time (first game time) executed before the special game state. The executed reach effect is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, in the second game time, the reach effect, which is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state, is actually the second effect. Unexpectedness can be given to the game by making the player recognize that the special information related to the game time was executed because the special information satisfied the predetermined condition. In addition, as a case where the reach effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting the expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player and a case where the game time is executed before the special game state is executed. In the case where it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in, in the effect, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state. Can set at least three cases, that is, the case where the special information related to the game time is executed due to satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest, and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

[Characteristic C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5,
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive effect that suggests executing the predetermined effect before executing the predetermined effect.

According to the characteristic C6, by executing the suggestive effect that suggests executing the predetermined effect before executing the predetermined effect, the player's attention level with respect to the predetermined effect to be executed, The degree of interest can be improved.

[Characteristic C7]
A gaming machine described in Feature C6,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the special game state is executed, the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined condition,
When there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time,
The suggestive effect is executed in the other game times (in the second embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game times),
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game time (in the second embodiment, the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic C7, even if there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time, the suggestion effect and the predetermined time are given by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. The effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

[Characteristic C8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7,
The object reproduced by the effect executing means is at least a part of the effect executed in at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state.

According to the characteristic C8, even when a continuous effect is executed over at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state, the continuous effect can be reproduced. it can.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature D1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Special game state starting means for starting a special game state for granting a privilege to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The special game state starting means,
When the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the second special game state is started,
The effect execution means,
The effect executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information related to the first game time (in the first embodiment, the effect executed in the special game state is the first case a1). Depending on the relationship between the game time executed before the game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the first game time in case a1 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] , The first game time [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] is determined to be an effect executed in the special game state [S2601, S2602, S2603 to S2605]/the first game time in case a2. The second game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the second game time in case a2 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] Corresponding to 2 game times] [S2601, S2607])
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic D1, the second special executed after the second game time in consideration of the special information of the first game time executed before the second game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. The effect in the game state can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to have a relationship between the special information relating to the first game time and the effect in the second special game state, and various effects from the first game time to the second special game state. Can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine described in Feature D1,
In the case where the second special game state is executed by the special information relating to the second game time satisfying the predetermined condition,
The effect execution means,
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (when there is a relationship between the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment),
In the second game time (the second game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment), of the effect executed in the first game time (the first game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least a part (perform the processing of S2308 and S2309),
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (the game time and the first game time executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment, If there is a relationship of),
In the second special game state (special game state after the first game time of the case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second game time (first game time of the case a1 of the first embodiment) At least a part of the executed effect is reproduced (the process of S2605 is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D2, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time, even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. .. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. The result of the determination of the special information related to the second game time is notified by the notification means, and the player is made aware that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, which is unexpected in the game. It is possible to impart sex. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced in the second special game state. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate the effect executed when the special information regarding the game times satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine described in Feature D2,
The effect execution means,
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment (When there is a relationship), before the reproduction, the first suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed (the process of S2606 is executed),
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time in the second special game state ((the game time executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment) And (in the case of the relationship between the first game times), before executing the reproduction, the second suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the effect that has already been executed is executed (the process of S2605 is executed). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic D3, the first suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, and at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced. Since the second suggestion effect is executed prior to, the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time or the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time, It is possible to improve the degree of interest and interest of the player.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine described in the feature D2 or D3,
The effect execution means,
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment If there is a relationship),
In the first special game state, which is started by the special information relating to the first game time satisfying the predetermined condition, the first suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed (S2606). Execute processing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D4, by executing an effect that suggests the content of the effect in the game time after the first special game state in the first special game state, for the game time after the first special game state ends. It is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest and expectation of the player.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the feature D5, the reach effect, which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, is actually caused by the special information related to the second game time. By letting the player recognize that the game is being executed, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Further, when at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced, the reach effect in the second game time is executed in the second special game state. It is possible to satisfy the demand of the player who wants to appreciate the reach effect at the game time again. Furthermore, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and as a reproduction of at least a part of the already executed effect. When it is executed, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the already executed effect, but actually it is executed because the special information related to the game time has satisfied a predetermined condition. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, the case to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest, and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature E1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Production execution means for executing production in each of the game times,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (In case d1 in the fourth embodiment),
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced,
It has already been executed after execution of the effect in the first game time and before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestive production that suggests reproducing the production.

According to the characteristic E1, the first game time in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second game time, even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Since at least a part of the effect executed in is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Further, by executing the suggestive effect before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, at least the effect executed in the first game time is executed in the second game time. The player can be given more recognition that only a part is reproduced. Then, only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game time is notified by the notification means, the player is made aware that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and thus the game is played. Can be given unexpectedness. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine described in Feature E1,
The effect execution means,
In addition to the case where the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (in the case of the case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced,
After the execution of the effect in the first game time and before the reproduction in the second game time, a suggestion effect indicating that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic E2, even when the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, Since at least a part of the effect executed in one game time is reproduced, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the special information related to the game time in which the reproduction is executed does not always satisfy the predetermined condition. .. As a result, when at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced, the feeling of emotion and expectation are given to the player, and the player's operation for the game time in which the reproduction is executed is performed. The degree of attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising:
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state starting means for starting a special game state for giving a privilege to a player is provided,
The effect execution means,
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment) Has
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced,
A game machine characterized by executing the suggestive effect after the start of a special game state executed after the first game time and before the reproduction in the second game time.

According to the feature E3, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and is executed in the first game time. The effect is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, for the first time, the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, and in the effect, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game time. However, in reality, it is possible to give a surprise to the game by making the player recognize that the special information related to the second game time has been executed because the special condition satisfies the predetermined condition. it can. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation regarding reproduction of the effect. Furthermore, if the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is executed due to the fact that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, a bonus is given to the player. Since the special game state in which is given is started, the player's expectation for the reproduction of the effect can be further improved.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to a player,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to the characteristic E4, the reach effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, in the production, the reach production, which was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the production executed in the first game time, actually has the special information related to the second game time satisfying the predetermined condition. By causing the player to recognize that the game is being executed due to, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Further, as the case where the reach effect is executed, at least one of the case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting the expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player and the case where the effect is executed in the first game time are executed. When it is executed as a reproduction of a part and as a reproduction, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the performance executed in the first game time, but in reality, the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set, that is, the case where it is executed due to the satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest, and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The effect execution means,
When another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time,
A gaming machine, wherein the suggestion effect is executed in the other game times.

According to the characteristic E5, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. The reproduction can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The object to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game time before the first game time, and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time. A gaming machine characterized by including.

According to the feature E6, even when a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. ..

The inventions of the characteristic A group, the characteristic B group, the characteristic C group, the characteristic D group, and the characteristic E group solve the following problems.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game. These effects include effects that are executed at a low frequency, such as reach effects that are executed with a low probability and effects that are executed only when a big hit lottery is won. Such an effect that is executed at a low frequency may be reproduced once by the player for the purpose of appreciation after being executed once. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in order to meet such a demand of a player, a gaming machine that executes an effect that reproduces an effect once executed is known.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature F1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player and that is different from the first image , Are displayed on the image display means (the objects A, B, and C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image,
When the first image is displayed in the period overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a manner having a relationship with the second image (in S3205 of the fifth embodiment). , Setting and displaying so that each object is displayed in a related manner by referring to the arrangement/timing table/In S3305 of the sixth embodiment, each object is displayed in a related manner Each object is displayed based on each display pattern table set to
A gaming machine characterized by that.

There is a game machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the display conditions of a plurality of images may overlap depending on the game state. In such a case, the relationship with other images displayed during the overlapping period (same period) , The plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving the player the impression of a complicated effect.

According to the characteristic F1, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed in a manner related to the second image. It is possible to improve the quality of the effect without causing a complicated impression to the player by the effect executed by being displayed in the period in which the two images overlap (the same period). In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period in which it overlaps with the second image, and may be displayed in a period in which it does not overlap with the second image. Therefore, a plurality of different images are displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature F2]
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
The game machine having the relevance includes a mode in which the first image and the second image have a narrative property in association with each other.

According to the characteristic F2, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping the second image, the first image and the second image are displayed in a story-related manner in association with each other. Therefore, the effect executed by being displayed in the period in which the first image and the second image are overlapped (the same period) can be made an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect executed by being displayed during the period in which the first image and the second image overlap each other has a narrative property, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
The degree of the advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image,
The degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed in a period in which the first image and the second image overlap each other (fifth embodiment) S3203 in /S3305 in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F3, the first image has different advantages and disadvantages of the game depending on whether the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image or the period not overlapping the second image. Since this is suggested, it is possible to execute a plurality of different-mode effects using the first image, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image. Even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage/disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps another image. , Interest and expectation can be improved.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The first image and the second image indicate different degrees of advantage and disadvantage of the game of different types (processing of S3203 of the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic F4, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage/disadvantage of various types of games using images.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means is
When displaying the first image in a period in which the first image does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit in a mode in which an image frame indicating the area of the first image is attached. Display,
A game machine characterized by displaying the first image on the image display means in a mode without the image frame, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image.

According to the feature F5, the effect including the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

According to the feature F6, various effects can be executed by using the image that changes with time.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic G1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
An expectation degree image storage unit that stores an expectation degree image that is an image that changes with time,
An image display means for displaying the expectation image as a performance,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The expectation degree image storage means,
A first expectation image,
A second expectation image,
Remember
The control means is
A case where the first expectation image is displayed on the image display means,
A case where the second expectation image is displayed on the image display means;
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image constituting at least a part of the first expectation image in the time axis direction and at least a part of the second expectation image in the time axis direction are constituted. Displaying a third expectation image which is the expectation image obtained by combining the second partial image in which the image is extracted with the second partial image in a related manner,
There is
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the first expectation image is displayed by the control unit is defined as a first probability,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the second expectation image is displayed by the control unit is defined as a second probability,
In the case where the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as the third probability,
The control means may set the third probability to be different from the first probability and to be different from the second probability.
The first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means (display using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment/sixth embodiment). Display using the display pattern table in
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G1, as the expectation image displayed on the image display means, in addition to the first expectation image and the second expectation image, the first partial image and the second partial image have relevance. Since the third expectation image combined in the form is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation image and the second expectation image. The third expectation image is an expectation image in which the first partial image and the second partial image are combined in a manner having relevance to each other. The quality can be improved. The first probability image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means so that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. Since it is displayed on the screen, the player's attention to the expectation image can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic G2]
A gaming machine described in Feature G1,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first degree-of-expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first degree-of-expectation image, a plurality of different display modes are displayed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means,
The third probability differs for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first expectation degree image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first expectation degree image, a plurality of different display images can be displayed. Since it is possible to display the third expectation image on the image display means in various manners, various effects can be performed using the third expectation image. In addition, since the third probability is different for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image, it is possible to improve the attention degree of the player with respect to the third expectation image and to enhance the interest of the game. be able to.

[Characteristic G3]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1 or the feature G2,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first degree-of-expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first degree-of-expectation image, a plurality of different display modes are displayed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means,
The relative display position of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is:
It is preset for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (the arrangement position of each object is preset for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed as the third expectation image on the image display means are different from each other in the plurality of third expectation images. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superposed on the image display unit as the third expectation image without any relation. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation image in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Characteristic G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first degree-of-expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first degree-of-expectation image, a plurality of different display modes are displayed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means,
The relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from each other in the plurality of third expectation images. Preset for each display mode (display timing of each object is preset for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature G4, the relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from each other in the third expectation image. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not displayed as the third expectation image on the image display means at a timing having no relation to each other. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation image in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic H1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player and that is different from the first image , Is displayed on the image display means,
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image,
When the first image is displayed in the period in which it overlaps the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is a predetermined arrangement position (the arrangement in the fifth embodiment. A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at an arrangement position determined by a timing table/an arrangement position set by a display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

There is a game machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the display conditions of a plurality of images may overlap depending on the game state. In such a case, the relationship with other images displayed during the overlapping period (same period) , The plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving the player the impression of a complicated effect.

According to the characteristic H1, when the first image is displayed in the period (same period) overlapping with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is a predetermined arrangement position. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression and improves the quality of the effect. You can In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period in which it overlaps with the second image, and may be displayed in a period in which it does not overlap with the second image. Therefore, a plurality of different images are displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Characteristic H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The control means is
In a plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display unit during a period in which the first image overlaps with the second image,
According to each of the different display modes, the first image is arranged at a predetermined relative position with respect to the second image (in the display/pattern table in the sixth embodiment). A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at a set arrangement position).

According to the feature H2, the first image is displayed in a plurality of different display modes during the period (the same period) that overlaps with the second image. Therefore, it is possible to use various images using the first image and the second image. The production can be executed. Further, according to each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means at the arrangement position whose relative position with respect to the second image is predetermined. In the above, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, various effects executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) do not give the player a complicated impression, and improve the quality of the effect. Can be made.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine described in the feature H1 or the feature H2,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image, the control unit relatively sets a predetermined timing with respect to the second image (in the fifth embodiment. A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the display timing determined by the arrangement/timing table/the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

According to the characteristic H3, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image (the same period), the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not displayed at timings that are not related to each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression, and further improves the quality of the effect. You can

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The degree of the advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is not displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image,
The degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed in a period in which the first image and the second image overlap each other (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in / / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature H4, the first image has different advantages and disadvantages of the game depending on whether it is displayed in the period overlapping the second image or in the period not overlapping the second image. Since this is suggested, it is possible to use the first image to execute effects in a plurality of different modes with different degrees of advantage and disadvantage of the game, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image. Even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage/disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps another image. , Interest and expectation can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position between the second image and the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, which improves the quality. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Characteristic H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The first image and the second image indicate the degree of advantages and disadvantages of the game of different types (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic H5, in each of the effect composed of the first image, the effect composed of the second image, and the effect composed of the first image and the second image, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of different types of games is suggested. can do. Therefore, depending on how to combine a plurality of images, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage or disadvantage of various kinds of games.

[Characteristic H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
The control means is
When displaying the first image in a period in which the first image does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit in a mode in which an image frame indicating the area of the first image is attached. Display,
A game machine characterized by displaying the first image on the image display means in a mode without the image frame, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image.

According to the characteristic H6, the effect including the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature H7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

According to the feature H7, various effects can be executed by using the image that changes with time.

<Feature group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic I1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player and that is different from the first image , Is displayed on the image display means,
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image, a predetermined timing relative to the second image (the arrangement/timing table in the fifth embodiment is used). A game machine characterized by displaying at the determined display timing/display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) on the image display means.

There is a game machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the display conditions of a plurality of images may overlap depending on the game state. In such a case, the relationship with other images displayed during the overlapping period (same period) , The plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving the player the impression of a complicated effect. The degree of advantage/disadvantage of the game indicates whether the state of the game times determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the state of the game times is advantageous for the player, such as the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, the degree of expectation that it is a probability variation jackpot, the degree of expectation that the game number is a probability variation state, etc. Indicates the degree to which there is or is a disadvantage.

According to the characteristic I1, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. The 1st image and the 2nd image are not displayed at a timing having no relation to each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression, and further improves the quality of the effect. You can In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image (the same period) or may be displayed in a period that does not overlap the second image. Therefore, the first image is used. It is possible to execute a plurality of effects in different modes and effectively utilize the first image.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means arranges the first image in an arrangement position in which a relative position between the first image and the second image is predetermined (arrangement position/third position determined in arrangement/timing table in fifth embodiment). A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at an arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

According to the characteristic I2, when the first image is displayed in the period (same period) overlapping with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is a predetermined arrangement position. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression and improves the quality of the effect. You can

[Characteristic I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The degree of the advantage/disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image,
The degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when displayed in a period in which the first image and the second image overlap each other (fifth embodiment) Display pattern table in / / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic I3, the first image has different degrees of advantage and disadvantage in the game when it is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image and when it is displayed in the period not overlapping with the second image. Since this is suggested, it is possible to use the first image to execute effects in a plurality of different modes with different degrees of advantage and disadvantage of the game, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image. Even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage/disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps another image. , Interest and expectation can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position between the second image and the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, which improves the quality. A high performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The first image and the second image indicate the degree of advantages and disadvantages of the game of different types (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic I4, in each of the effect composed of the first image, the effect composed of the second image, and the effect composed of the first image and the second image, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of different types of games is suggested. can do. Therefore, depending on how to combine a plurality of images, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage or disadvantage of various kinds of games.

[Characteristic I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The control means is
When displaying the first image in a period in which the first image does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit in a mode in which an image frame indicating the area of the first image is attached. Display,
A game machine characterized by displaying the first image on the image display means in a mode without the image frame, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image.

According to the feature I5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Characteristic I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

According to the feature I6, various effects can be executed by using the image that changes with time.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic J1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
An image storage unit that stores an image that allows the player to be aware of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation,
An image display means for displaying the image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image stored in the image storage means, which displays on the image display means a first image which enables the player to be aware of advantages/disadvantages of a game situation,
A combination image in which the first image is combined with a second image different from the first image, which is recognition regarding advantages and disadvantages of a game situation, and is not combined with the second image. A combination image that allows the player to be given a recognition different from the recognition given to the player when the first image is displayed is displayed on the image display means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments). , The display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of the dog in the box, and gives the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3/C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a display pattern showing that the dog in the box gets wet due to bad weather, and the game situation is Giving the player recognition of a disadvantage/Modification 15)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature J1, recognition that gives the player advantages and disadvantages of the game when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, and the first image is referred to as the second image. Since it is possible to change the recognition given to the player regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game when they are displayed in combination on the image display means, it is possible to execute various effects using the first image. The image of can be used effectively. The game status is based on the game status such as whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and whether or not the special information has a relatively high probability of satisfying the predetermined condition. Say the situation.

[Characteristic J2]
A game machine according to feature J1,
The control means, when displaying the first image in combination with the second image, determines the relative position between the first image and the second image according to the situation of the game. By setting (setting at the placement position determined by the placement/timing table in the fifth embodiment/setting at the placement position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), and displaying on the image display means. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to the feature J2, the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means, so the first image and the second image Using, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Characteristic J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
When the control means displays the first image in combination with the second image, the relative timing of displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image. Is set according to the situation of the game (set to the display timing determined by the arrangement/timing table in the fifth embodiment/set to the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A game machine displaying on the image display means.

According to the feature J3, the relative timing of displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image is set according to the situation of the game and displayed on the image display means. The image and the second image can be used to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Characteristic J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
At least one of the first image or the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

According to the feature J4, various effects can be executed by using an image that is an image that changes with time.

<Characteristic K group>
The characteristic K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic K1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
At least an image storage unit that stores the first image, the second image, and the third image,
Image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The second image is displayed by the control unit more than when the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. Regarding the situation of the game to the player, when (the image in which the dog shows the face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image Despite giving a positive recognition,
The image display unit combines the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) by the control unit. The second image (the image in which the dog makes a face out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed more in the third image (the image of the rain in the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), the gaming machine is provided with more advantageous recognition of the game situation than the case of being displayed on the image display means in combination.

According to the characteristic K1, the player is more likely to be displayed when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Despite giving an advantageous recognition of the game situation, displaying the first image in combination with the third image is better than displaying the second image in combination with the third image. , Give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, various effects can be executed depending on how the images are combined. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image or the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on whether or not the third image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the image displayed on the image display means.

[Characteristic K2]
A gaming machine described in the characteristic K1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image that is a time-varying image (the object C that temporally changes in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3).
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images that configure at least a part of a period in the time axis direction of the first temporal change image. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic K2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the period of the first time-dependent change image in the time axis direction. By extracting an image and combining it with the third image, it is possible to further execute various effects.

[Characteristic K3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic K1 or the characteristic K2,
The control means is
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that there is.

According to the characteristic K3, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the case where the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is displayed and the case where it is not displayed Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Characteristic K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1) in the C display pattern table in the sixth embodiment). The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect by is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic K4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter, the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (first case) In the case of displaying (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Therefore, in the first case, in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter, in the second case, in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition and improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to execute more various effects.

[Characteristic K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image that is a time-varying image (the object B that temporally changes in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3).
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of a period in the time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

According to the characteristic K5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time-axis direction of the second temporal change image, various effects can be obtained by using the second temporal change image. Can be performed. For example, when the first image and the second image are displayed in combination with the second temporal change image, the third image that is a part of the second temporal change image is displayed as the first image or the second image. When displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the perception of the game situation to the player.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature L1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
At least an image storage unit that stores the first image, the second image, and the third image,
Image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The second image is displayed by the control unit more than when the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. In the case where (the image in which the dog makes a face out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability of meeting,
The control unit combines the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to display the image. The second image (the image in which the dog faces the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed in the third image (the rain image in the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that when the special information is displayed on the image display means.

According to the feature L1, the special information is more predetermined when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Although the probability of satisfying the condition is high, the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the third image is better than the case where the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. There is a high probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player regarding whether or not the third image is displayed.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine described in the feature L1,
The image storage means stores a first time-varying image that is a time-varying image (the object C that temporally changes in the order of image C1, image C2, and image C3).
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images that configure at least a part of a period in the time axis direction of the first temporal change image. Amusement machine.

According to the feature L2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the period of time in the time axis direction of the first temporal change image, and thus the first temporal change image is displayed. In this case, the degree of attention of the player regarding whether or not to display the third image can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means is
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image, and then the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that there is.

According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case where the second image is not displayed and the case where the second image is not displayed and the case where the second image is not displayed are displayed. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1) in the C display pattern table in the sixth embodiment). The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect by is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (first case) In the case of displaying (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Therefore, in the first case, in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter, in the second case, in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition and improve the interest of the game. Further, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to execute more various effects.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image that is a time-varying image (the object B that temporally changes in the order of image B1, image B2, and image B3).
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of a period in the time axis direction of the second time-varying image.

According to the feature L5, the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the period of time in the time axis direction of the second time-varying image, so that various effects are produced using the second time-varying image. Can be performed. For example, when the first image and the second image are displayed in combination with the second temporal change image, the third image that is a part of the second temporal change image is displayed as the first image or the second image. When displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the perception of the game situation to the player.

The inventions of the characteristic group F, the characteristic group G, the characteristic group H, the characteristic group I, the characteristic group J, the characteristic group K, and the characteristic group L solve the following problems.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine that displays an object image on an image display unit and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such object images are prepared, and each object image suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature M1]
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
Sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound (background music) which is a sound corresponding to the first moving image in a first output mode (a mode in which background music is output at a predetermined volume);
The image display means is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode (mode for displaying a demo video), and the sound output means is switched from the first output mode to the second output mode (for background music). Transition condition determining means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for transitioning to a mode in which output is stopped), is satisfied,
Return condition determination means for determining whether or not a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and returning the sound output means to the first output mode is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising:
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode,
After the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode, and when the return condition is satisfied after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode,
When returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image as the first display mode, the image display unit displays the first moving image from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Start
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and, when outputting the moving picture corresponding sound in the first output manner, starts outputting from the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture corresponding sound. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature M1, if the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode and after the image display means shifts to the second display mode, the image display means Starts the display from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means outputs the first output mode. When outputting the sound corresponding to the moving image by returning to step 1, the output is started from the predetermined temporal position of the sound corresponding to the moving image. Therefore, after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode, and after the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, the image display unit displays the first state according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. The display of the first moving image and the output of the moving image corresponding sound can be easily synchronized, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image starts changes. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first moving image changes in accordance with the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, the image display means returns after transitioning to the second display mode. When the condition is satisfied, the configuration for starting the display of the first moving image from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means When returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the second display mode. When the display unit continues the reproduction of the first moving image as an internal process even after the display unit shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, and when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode. The internal processing includes a configuration for displaying the first moving image that is continuously reproduced.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine described in feature M1,
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output unit shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode through a reduction mode in which the volume of the video corresponding sound is reduced with the passage of time while continuing to output the video corresponding sound. Then
The image display means, after the timing when the sound output means shifts to the second output mode, shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
When the return condition is satisfied during the period when the sound output unit is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume in the first output mode.

According to the feature M2, when the return condition is satisfied during the reduction mode, the image display unit continues the first display mode, and the sound output unit returns the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the first mode. Since the mode is returned to the output mode, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the moving image corresponding sound.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine described in the feature M1 or the feature M2,
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output unit outputs the moving image corresponding sound to a second volume lower than the first volume from the first output mode of outputting the moving image corresponding sound at a first volume. Transition to the second output mode of outputting at the volume of
The image display unit shifts to the second display mode after a lapse of a predetermined time after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode,
If the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit has shifted to the second output mode and before the image display unit has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume of the first volume.

According to the feature M3, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and before the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, the image display is performed. The means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume of the first volume. Therefore, while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without a feeling of discomfort.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M3,
The predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal start position of the first moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture corresponding sound is a temporal starting position of the moving picture corresponding sound.

According to the feature M4, the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and after the image display unit shifts to the second display mode. When returning to the first output mode, the display is started from the temporal start position of the first moving image, and the output is started from the temporal start position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the first moving image and the output of the moving picture corresponding sound is started from the temporal middle position. You can For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started at a position midway in time of the first video and the output of the sound corresponding to the video is started at a position midway in time, the player is satisfied with the return condition. After that, since the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image are to be viewed from a position in the middle of time, it is uncomfortable and there is a portion of the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image that is not being listened to. There is a possibility that you can feel it. On the other hand, according to the feature M4, since the player can watch the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound from the temporal head position, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player. At the same time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound can be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4,
The second display mode is a mode in which a second video different from the first video is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the first video is stopped and displayed, and the first video is hidden. And a mode of displaying a still image different from the first moving image, or a mode of hiding the moving image and the still image,
The first output mode is a mode in which the sound corresponding to the moving image is output at a volume of a first volume,
The second output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a second volume lower than the first volume, or the moving image corresponding sound is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature M5, it is possible to make the player recognize that the transition condition is satisfied and the image display means and the sound output means have been shifted to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine described in feature M5,
A game machine characterized in that the volume of the second volume is equal to or lower than a volume of volume that cannot be recognized by the player.

According to the feature M6, when the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the moving image corresponding sound becomes equal to or lower than the volume that the player cannot recognize, so the transition condition is satisfied and the sound is output. It is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the means has already been shifted to the second output mode.

[Feature M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6,
A special game state start means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
The transition condition determination means performs a display corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means, and after the game times are finished, neither the special game state nor the next game time is started, and a predetermined time has passed. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized by determining that the transition condition is satisfied.

After the game time is over, if the special game state or the next game time is not started and a predetermined time has passed, it is highly possible that the player is not playing a game on the game machine. Therefore, according to the feature M7, the transition condition can be satisfied in a state where there is a high possibility that the player is not playing the game.

[Feature M8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M7,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
The game machine characterized in that the transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied when the game ball is not detected by the detection means for a predetermined time.

According to the feature M8, since the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board, the transition condition is satisfied even when the player is playing the game, which is an uncomfortable situation for the player. Occurrence can be reduced.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8,
The game machine characterized in that the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the acquisition means after the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature M9, when the special information is acquired, the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode, so that there is an expectation that the special information is acquired. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature M10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M9,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
The game machine characterized in that the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected by the detection means after the transition condition is satisfied.

According to the feature M10, even after the transition condition is established, the return condition is established if the game ball is ejected to the game board, so that the return condition is established even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce a situation that is uncomfortable for the player such as not being established for a long time (for example, 1 minute).

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic N1]
As a first display mode, image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image),
As a first output mode, sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level,
Command receiving means for receiving a command,
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means is another display mode in which continuity with the predetermined moving image is broken (a mode in which a demo moving image is displayed), and the sound output means has lost continuity with the moving image corresponding sound. Identification information storage means for storing identification information (cueing determination flag) capable of identifying the particular mode, which is another output mode (mode in which output of background music is stopped),
When the command receiving means receives a specific command (return condition fulfillment command), the determining means determines whether or not the specific mode is set based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means. When,
Equipped with
When the command receiving unit receives the specific command and the determining unit determines the specific mode based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 11 ). Is
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts displaying the predetermined moving image at a predetermined temporal position (FIG. 11 ).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound from a predetermined temporal position (FIG. 11).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic N1, when the image display means is returned to the first display manner and the sound output means is returned to the first output manner from the specific manner, the time position of the predetermined moving image which the image display means starts to display. Also, since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the moving picture-compatible sound is predetermined, it is possible to easily synchronize the predetermined moving picture and the moving picture-compatible sound.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine described in the feature N1,
In the case where the command receiving unit receives the specific command and the determining unit determines based on the identification information that the specific mode is not set, the image display unit determines whether the continuity with the predetermined moving image is satisfied. When the display mode is maintained (when the mode is from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 11),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in a mode in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13),
The sound output unit returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving picture corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving picture in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature N2, when the image display means is returned to the first display manner and the sound output means is returned to the first output manner from the display manner in which continuity with the predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display means Keeps displaying a predetermined moving image in a continuous manner, and the sound output means outputs a moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined continuous moving image, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. The image display means and the sound output means can be returned to the first display mode and the first output mode, respectively.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2,
The predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image is a temporal start position of the predetermined moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture corresponding sound is a temporal starting position of the moving picture corresponding sound.

According to the feature N3, when the image display means is returned to the first display manner and the sound output means is returned to the first output manner from the specific manner, the time position of the predetermined moving image which the image display means starts to display. Since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the video-compatible sound is the temporal start position, the display is started from the middle of the predetermined video and the output is started from the middle of the video-compatible sound. Compared with the case where it is performed, the processing executed by the image display means and the sound output means is easier and the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3,
The other display mode is a mode in which the image display unit displays an image different from the predetermined moving image, or a mode in which the image display is stopped.

According to the feature N4, when returning the image display means to the first display mode from the specific mode, another display mode as the specific mode before returning to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image. Since it is a mode in which the image is displayed or a mode in which the image display is stopped, even if the display is returned to the first display mode and the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image. It is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player. The image includes a moving image and a still image.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4,
The other output mode is a mode in which the sound output means outputs another sound different from the sound corresponding to the moving picture, and the sound output means corresponds to the moving picture or the other sound at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player. Or a mode in which the sound output means stops the output.

According to the feature N5, when the sound output means is returned from the specific mode to the first output mode, another output mode as the specific mode before the return to the first output mode is different from the moving image corresponding sound. Since it is a mode in which another sound is output, a mode in which a moving image is supported or another sound is output at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player, or a mode in which the output is stopped, the first output mode is selected. Even if the player returns to start outputting the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image whose display is started from a predetermined temporal position, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature O1]
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition,
An elapsed time determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed,
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (a background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 80, a demo moving image in the example shown in FIG. 81) as a first display mode,
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means,
When it is determined by the elapsed time determination means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the first display mode is switched to the second display mode (mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed) (FIGS. 80 and 81). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode has ended, the second display mode shifts to the first display mode and the first display mode shifts to the first display mode. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image (FIGS. 80 and 81).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature O1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the second display mode shifts to the first display mode and the first display mode is restored. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first moving image is displayed and the first moving image is displayed. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first moving image is displayed and the first moving image is displayed, for example, the second display mode is set in advance. When the display period ends, the configuration for starting the display of the first moving image from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means. When the second display mode is switched to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time from the second display mode. , The reproduction of the first moving image is continued as an internal process even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the second display mode shifts to the first display mode. At this time, as an internal process, a configuration for displaying the first moving image that is continuously reproduced can be cited.

Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic O1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends at substantially the same time in each gaming machine and the gaming machine shifts to the first display mode, and each gaming machine When the machine shifts to the first display mode and displays the first moving image, since the display starts from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, the first displayed on each gaming machine. You can synchronize the videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving image displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine described in feature O1,
A transition condition determination unit that determines whether or not a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the image display unit to the third display mode (a mode for displaying a demo moving image) is provided,
The image display means,
When the transition condition is satisfied during the first display mode (during the mode in which the background moving image is displayed), the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the satisfaction of the transition condition (FIG. 11),
When the transition condition is met during the second display mode (during the mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed), when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the Shift to the third display mode (FIG. 82),
A game machine characterized by starting display from a predetermined temporal position of the third moving image when moving to the third display mode and displaying a third moving image (demo moving image).

According to the characteristic O2, even when the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, Since the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic O2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends at the same time in each gaming machine, and the gaming machine shifts to the third display mode, and each gaming machine When the machine shifts to the third display mode and displays the third moving image, the display starts from a predetermined temporal position of the third moving image, so that the third displayed on each gaming machine. You can synchronize the videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the third moving image displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine described in feature O2,
A return condition determining unit that determines whether or not a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display unit to the first display mode (a mode in which a background moving image is displayed) is satisfied;
The image display means,
When the return condition is satisfied during the third display mode (during the mode of displaying the demo video), the return to the first display mode is triggered by the satisfaction of the return condition (FIG. 11),
If the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode (during the mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed), the end of the predetermined display period of the second display mode is used as a trigger. Return to the first display mode (FIG. 83),
A game machine characterized by, when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, starting the display from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image.

According to the feature O3, even when the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is not interrupted. Since the display mode is returned to the first display mode when the predetermined display period ends, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Characteristic O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal start position of the first moving image.

According to the characteristic O4, in comparison with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the first moving image when the first moving image is displayed after moving or returning to the first display mode, It is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the person. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a temporal middle position of the first moving image when the first moving image is displayed after moving or returning to the first display mode, the player Since the first moving image is to be viewed from a position midway in time, it may be uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the first moving image that is not being viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O4, since the player can watch the first moving image from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player and at the same time. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the videos can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature O5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4,
A sound output unit for outputting a moving image corresponding sound that is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display unit,
The sound output means, when the image display means starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, the first moving image corresponding sound (background) corresponding to the first moving image. A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined time position of (music).

According to the characteristic O5, the display of the first moving image and the output of the first moving image corresponding sound are easily synchronized with each other, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound starts is changed. be able to. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started changes, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display unit displays the first moving image of the first moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the first moving image corresponding sound output from the temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode. The image display means secondly displays the temporal position of the first moving image-adaptive sound at which output is started when the configuration starts outputting the moving image-adaptive sound or when the first moving image-adaptive sound is output. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode, the reproduction of the first moving image corresponding sound is continued as an internal process even after the image display unit transits from the first display mode to the second display mode. In addition, when the image display means shifts or returns from the second display mode to the first display mode, the internal processing may be such that the continuously reproduced first moving image corresponding sound is output. ..

[Characteristic O6]
A gaming machine according to feature O5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound is a temporal start position of the first moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature O6, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the output of the first moving image-compatible sound is started from a temporal middle position. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output of the first moving image-adaptive sound is started at a position midway in time, the player can enjoy the first moving image-adaptive sound from a position midway in time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or feels unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the first moving image corresponding sound that is not being listened to. On the other hand, according to the feature O6, since it is possible to allow the player to listen to the first moving image corresponding sound from the temporal head position, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, and It is possible to give the player the satisfaction that all the first moving image-compatible sounds can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature O7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal start position of the third moving image.

According to the feature O7, when the third moving image is displayed and the third moving image is displayed, the player is compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the third moving image. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a temporal middle position of the third moving image when the third moving image is displayed and the third moving image is displayed, the player can display the third moving image. Since the moving image is viewed from a position midway in time, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory because there is a portion of the third moving image that is not being viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O7, since the player can watch the third moving image from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, and the third It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the videos can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O4,
A sound output unit for outputting a moving image corresponding sound that is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display unit,
The sound output means, when the image display means starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the third moving picture, a third moving picture corresponding sound (demo) corresponding to the third moving picture. A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined time position of (music).

According to the feature O8, the display of the third moving image and the output of the third moving image corresponding sound are easily synchronized with each other as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is changed. be able to. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started varies, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display unit displays the third moving image. In the case of starting the display from a predetermined temporal position, the third moving image corresponding sound output from the temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode. The image display means secondly displays the temporal position of the third moving image-adaptive sound to be output when shifting to the configuration for starting the output of the moving image-compliant sound or the aspect of outputting the third moving image-compliant sound. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time after the shift to the mode, and the reproduction of the third moving image corresponding sound is continued as an internal process even after the image display unit shifts from the third display mode to the second display mode. In addition, when the image display means shifts from the second display mode to the third display mode, the internal processing may be such that the continuously reproduced third moving image-compatible sound is output.

[Feature O9]
A gaming machine described in feature O8,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound is a temporal starting position of the third moving image corresponding sound.

According to the feature O9, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started from the midway position in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output of the third moving image-adaptive sound is started at a temporally middle position, the player can enjoy the third moving image-corresponding sound from a temporal middle position. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or feels unsatisfactory because there is a portion of the third moving image corresponding sound that he/she is not listening to. On the other hand, according to the feature O9, since it is possible to allow the player to listen to the third moving image corresponding sound from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, and It is possible to give the player the satisfaction that all the third moving image corresponding sounds can be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The inventions of the characteristic group M, the characteristic group N, and the characteristic group O solve the following problems.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various performances are performed for the purpose of improving the entertainment of the game. For example, there is known a gaming machine that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Characteristic P1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Display the number of hold displays (the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 and the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 in the eighth and ninth embodiments) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode. And holding display means for changing the display mode of the displayed hold display (holding effect content determination processing in the eighth and ninth embodiments),
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Prior to the change of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display means, a suggestion effect (FIG. 89, FIG. 90, FIG. 100, FIG. 105) suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Conventionally, by displaying a hold display, the number of game times to be executed has been shown to the player. However, regarding the hold display, further improvement of the technique is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

According to the feature P1, since the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the game is performed with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display. It is possible to make the person pay attention and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine described in Feature P1,
The effect execution means selects the suggestive effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared in accordance with an object of which the hold display means changes the display mode among the displayed hold displays ( (Holding effect content determination processing in the eighth and ninth embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature P2, since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected according to the hold display which is the target of the change of the display mode, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect and the target of which the display mode is changed. It is possible to give the player an expectation as to which of the pending displays is.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine described in the feature P1 or the feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order of determination by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of FIG. , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit becomes shorter, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the special information is earlier in the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display, and the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the hold display corresponding to the special information. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information whose order of determination by the determination means is earlier among the displayed hold displays. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature P3, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, when changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of the hold display is increased. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display that is later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays is changed, the hold display is changed. Since the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display form between before and after the change in the display form is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, further expectation. A feeling can be imparted.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine described in the feature P1 or the feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit, before the special information that corresponds to the target hold display of which the display mode is changed Is also changed to a display mode at a higher stage (FIGS. 101, 103, 104)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

If there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. There are cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature P4, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit before the special information corresponding to the hold display of which the display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode of. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judgment means after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode is Even if it changes, the hold display in which the display mode has changed changes to a higher display mode than the display mode of the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode, and thus the player's expectation is lowered. Can be suppressed and, at the same time, a higher expectation can be imparted.

[Feature P5]
A gaming machine described in Feature P3 or Feature P4,
The effect execution unit,
Depending on the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means when executing the suggestive effect. Then, a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared (the eighth to tenth embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature P5, a plurality of types of suggestive effects are prepared in accordance with the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Since a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from the inside, in addition to being able to give the player an expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, as a suggestive effect before the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type of effect to be executed.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Characteristic Q1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Hold display means for displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of the special information stored by the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode,
A gaming machine comprising:
The holding display means,
When determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of which the display mode is to be determined (eighth embodiment). To 10th Embodiment and Modification 28)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q1, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of which the display mode is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the information about the game times (hereinafter also referred to as the hold game times) corresponding to other hold displays to the player by using the hold display of the object whose display mode is determined. For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is determined is more specific to the player than the special information to be determined by the determination means before the special information. When it is advantageous, in addition to the information of the hold display itself for which the display mode is determined, such as determining the display mode of the hold display that is the target of the display mode determination to a specific display mode, Information can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player is not limited to guessing the outcome of one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, and is executed before and after that. Various inferences are also made regarding the outcome of the held game times. Therefore, a new playability can be created by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency as compared with the conventional art, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

[Characteristic Q2]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q1,
The holding display means,
It is possible to change the display mode of the displayed hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, based on special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for changing the display mode, after the change of the hold display of the target for changing the display mode Determine display mode (eighth to tenth embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q2, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed is based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Since the display mode after the display is changed is determined, it is possible to suggest the information about the pending game times corresponding to the other pending displays to the player by using the pending display whose display mode is changed. For example, based on the special information corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the target of changing the display mode, the change of the hold display of the target of changing the display mode By determining the subsequent display mode, the following playability can be realized. As an example, when changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit before the special information that corresponds to the target hold display whose display mode is changed. Can be changed to a higher-level display mode (display mode that is advantageous to the player). Thus, according to the feature Q2, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic Q3]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order of determination by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of FIG. , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit becomes shorter, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the special information is earlier in the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display, and the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the hold display corresponding to the special information. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information whose order of determination by the determination means is earlier among the displayed hold displays. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature Q3, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of the hold display is increased. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display that is later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays is changed, the hold display is changed. Since the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display form between before and after the change in the display form is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, further expectation. A feeling can be imparted.

[Characteristic Q4]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit, before the special information that corresponds to the target hold display of which the display mode is changed Is also changed to a display mode at a higher stage (FIGS. 101, 103, 104)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

If there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. There are cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature Q4, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit before the special information corresponding to the hold display of which the display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode of. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judgment means after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode is Even if it changes, the hold display in which the display mode has changed changes to a higher display mode than the display mode of the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode, and thus the player's expectation is lowered. Can be suppressed and, at the same time, a higher expectation can be imparted.

[Characteristic Q5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q4,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before the hold display means changes the display mode of the hold display (FIGS. 89 and 90, 90). (Figs. 100 and 105)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q5, prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed. It is possible to make the person pay attention and to give a sense of expectation.

[Characteristic Q6]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q5,
The effect execution unit,
Depending on the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means when executing the suggestive effect. Then, a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared (the eighth to tenth embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature Q6, a plurality of types of suggestive effects are prepared according to the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Since a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from the inside, in addition to being able to give the player an expectation for the change in the display mode of the hold display, as a suggestive effect before the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type of effect to be executed.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Feature R1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Hold display means for displaying the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored by the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode, and changing the display mode of the displayed hold display,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Performs production execution determination processing for determining whether or not a production execution condition that is a condition for executing a predetermined production is satisfied,
The holding display means,
While determining whether or not a display mode change condition that is a condition for changing the display mode of the hold display is determined,
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed (eighth embodiment to tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the display mode of the hold display is changed independently of the execution of the predetermined effect even though the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the player is given the predetermined effect. It cannot be recognized that there is a correlation between the execution and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the player cannot be focused on the change in the display mode of the hold display. In other words, the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display only bring different effects to the player, and these two do not function synergistically.

According to the feature R1, when the performance execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to let the player recognize that there is a correlation between and, and by using the execution of a predetermined effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display. That is, in addition to the effect of executing a predetermined effect such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension for the subsequent game times, By changing the display mode of the hold display after the production of, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and tense in a synergistic manner with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display. Can be planned.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The holding display means,
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the predetermined effect is executed (10th embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the characteristic R2, when the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the predetermined effect is executed, so that the predetermined effect is executed. It is possible to overturn the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display changes after being played, and it is possible to give the game a surprise. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The player is provided with selection means (production operation button 24) for selecting a predetermined hold display,
The holding display means,
While performing the changeability determination process of determining whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of each displayed hold
It is determined whether the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection unit and the determination result of the changeability determination process (tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature R3, it is possible to create a new game property such as allowing the player to select the hold display. Further, since it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeable determination process, the hold display selected by the player himself/herself is displayed. A sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode changes can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of (1) is increased (eighth embodiment and tenth embodiment). form)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit becomes shorter, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the special information is earlier in the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display, and the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the hold display corresponding to the special information. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information whose order of determination by the determination means is earlier among the displayed hold displays. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the characteristic R4, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, when changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of the hold display is increased. Therefore, if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display that is relatively later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays changes (or the player selects Even if the display mode of the held display is changed), since the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the held display becomes large, the player's It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation and, at the same time, to give a further expectation.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88(b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit, before the special information that corresponds to the target hold display of which the display mode is changed Is also changed to a display mode at a higher stage (9th and 10th embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

If there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. There are cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

According to the feature R5, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit before the special information corresponding to the hold display of which the display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode of. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the player's wishes, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means is set after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. Even when it changes (or when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changed), the hold display in which the display mode has changed is the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Since the display mode is changed to a higher display mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, to provide a further expectation.

The inventions of the characteristic P group, the characteristic Q group, and the characteristic R group solve the following problems.

Conventionally, by displaying a hold display, the number of game times to be executed has been shown to the player.

Here, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

A configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the characteristic A group to the characteristic R group are appropriately combined may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start ball which is provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter Section, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering section,
A gaming machine comprising: an acquisition information storage unit that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition unit when a game ball enters the starting ball entering unit.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each mode described in the section of the summary of the invention are provided in order to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. If the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine main body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. .. window 19... glass unit 20... upper plate 21... lower plate 22... discharge port 23... lever 24... production operation button 25... operation handle 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32... General winning opening 33... First starting opening 34... Second starting opening 34a... Electric Character 34b...Electric character driving unit 35...Through gate 36...Variable winning device 36a...Large winning opening 36b...Opening/closing door 36c...Variable winning driving unit 37...Special Figure unit 37a... 1st result display section 37b... 2nd result display section 37c... 1st hold display section 37d... 2nd hold display section 38... Universal figure unit 39... Round Display unit 40... Variable display unit 41... Design display device 41a... Display surface 41aL... Display area 41aS... Display area 42... Nail 43... Out port 45... Main Display 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56. .. Case rail 60... Main control unit 61... Main control board 62... Main side MPU
63...Main ROM
64...Main RAM
63a... Acceptance table storage area 63b... Sorting table storage area 63c... Reach determination table storage area 63d... Fluctuating time table storage area 63e... Stop result table storage area 63f... Command Information storage area 64a... Lottery counter buffer 64b... Suspended information storage area 64c... Electricity holding area 64d... Various counter areas 64e... Various flag storage area 64f... Destination determination processing result Storage area 67a...Various detection sensors 70...Payout control device 71...Payout device 80...Launch control device 81...Game ball launch mechanism 85...Power supply device 86...Power failure monitoring circuit 90... Audio emission control device 91... Audio emission control board 92... Sound side MPU
93... Sound side ROM
93a... Production pattern table storage area 93b... Variable display pattern table storage area 94... Sound side RAM
94a...Various flag storage areas 94b...Various counter areas 94c...Lottery counter area 96...RTC
100... Display control device 101... Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104... Work RAM
106... Character ROM
107... Video RAM
PA... Game area PC... Winning counter area AE... Execution area Ra... First holding area Rb... Second holding area Dm11-Dm14, Dm21-Dm24... Hold display

Claims (1)

Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquisition information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Hold display means for displaying the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored by the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode, and changing the display mode of the displayed hold display,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed, before the display mode of the hold display is changed by the hold display means.